NetDVMS - Schmidt Security Pro

NetDVMS - Schmidt Security Pro
NetDVMS 6.5f
Network Video Recorder
User Manual
On-Net Surveillance Systems Inc. (OnSSI)
One Blue Hill Plaza, 7th Floor | P.O. Box 1555
Pearl River NY 10965
P: 845-732-7900 | T: 845-732-7900
info@onssi.com | www.onssi.com
i
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
Table Of Contents
WELCOME ...........................................................................................................9
SEVERAL TARGETED COMPONENTS IN ONE ................................................................................. 9
NAVIGATING THE BUILT-IN HELP SYSTEM................................................................................... 10
Contents Tab............................................................................................................................................................10
Search Tab...............................................................................................................................................................10
LINKS IN HELP TOPICS .............................................................................................................. 10
PRINTING HELP TOPICS ............................................................................................................. 11
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS................................................................................12
NetDVMS Surveillance System Server ....................................................................................................................12
NetGuard-EVS .........................................................................................................................................................13
Ocularis Client Lite ...................................................................................................................................................13
NetGuard..................................................................................................................................................................13
NetPDA/NetCell Server ............................................................................................................................................14
NetPDA/NetCell Client .............................................................................................................................................15
NetMatrix Monitor .....................................................................................................................................................15
INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................18
UPGRADING .............................................................................................................................. 19
Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................................................19
Backing Up Your Current Configuration ...................................................................................................................19
Removing the Current Version .................................................................................................................................20
Installing the New Version........................................................................................................................................20
Restoring a Configuration Backup (if Required).......................................................................................................21
Updating Video Device Drivers ................................................................................................................................21
Upgrading NetGuard-EVS........................................................................................................................................21
ADMINISTRATION .............................................................................................22
ADMINISTRATOR WINDOW ......................................................................................................... 22
Device Manager Section ..........................................................................................................................................22
ADDING DEVICES ...................................................................................................................... 23
EDITING SETTINGS FOR DEVICES ............................................................................................... 23
EDITING SETTINGS FOR CAMERAS ............................................................................................. 23
Renaming a Camera ................................................................................................................................................23
Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras ................................................................................................................24
EDITING SETTINGS FOR AUDIO SOURCES ................................................................................... 24
DISABLING/ENABLING CAMERAS AND AUDIO SOURCES .............................................................. 24
Administrator Window's Buttons...............................................................................................................................25
DEVICES & DLKS ..................................................................................................................... 29
How To Add A Device ..............................................................................................................................................29
Edit Device Settings Window ...................................................................................................................................32
Identify Video Device Section...................................................................................................................................32
Network Settings for Video Device Section..............................................................................................................34
P/T/Z Camera Selection Section ..............................................................................................................................35
1
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
Camera List and Fields ............................................................................................................................................36
CAMERAS ................................................................................................................................. 37
Camera Settings for [Device Name][Camera Name] Window..................................................................................37
Speedup Settings .....................................................................................................................................................38
Recording Settings ...................................................................................................................................................38
Live Settings.............................................................................................................................................................40
Audio ........................................................................................................................................................................40
Fisheye.....................................................................................................................................................................41
Motion Detection Settings ........................................................................................................................................41
Database Settings ....................................................................................................................................................41
Database Resizing ...................................................................................................................................................44
Image Quality... ........................................................................................................................................................44
Event Notifications....................................................................................................................................................44
Outputs.....................................................................................................................................................................44
PTZ Preset Positions... (PTZ Cameras Only) ..........................................................................................................45
Editing Camera Name/Number ................................................................................................................................45
Event Notifications....................................................................................................................................................46
What Is an Event Notification? .................................................................................................................................46
Specifying Events for which Event Notification Should Be Used .............................................................................46
Fisheye (360° Views) ...............................................................................................................................................47
Fisheye View Adjustment .........................................................................................................................................48
Previewing the Fisheye View ...................................................................................................................................48
Image Resolution .....................................................................................................................................................49
Motion Detection ......................................................................................................................................................49
Noise Sensitivity .......................................................................................................................................................50
Motion Sensitivity .....................................................................................................................................................51
Define Exclusion Regions Window...........................................................................................................................51
Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Should Be Disabled ...............................................................................51
Define Exclusion Regions Window's Buttons and Check Boxes..............................................................................52
Output Settings.........................................................................................................................................................52
Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion ..............................................................................53
PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom).................................................................................................................................................54
Why Use Preset Positions?......................................................................................................................................55
Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras ....................................................................................................55
How to Define a Preset Position...............................................................................................................................56
PTZ Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name] Window's Sections ........................................................57
PTZ View Section.....................................................................................................................................................57
Preset Positions Section ..........................................................................................................................................58
Preset Position on Events Section ...........................................................................................................................59
Patrolling Section .....................................................................................................................................................59
Event Window (for PTZ Preset Positions on Event).................................................................................................60
Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events ................................................................................................60
PTZ Patrolling Window.............................................................................................................................................61
Patrol Scheme..........................................................................................................................................................61
Selecting Preset Positions to Be Used for a PTZ Patrol Scheme ............................................................................62
Specifying Timing Settings for a PTZ Patrol Scheme ..............................................................................................62
PTZ Patrolling Actions on Detected Motion..............................................................................................................63
PTZ Scanning...........................................................................................................................................................63
Quality, Resolution, etc. ...........................................................................................................................................63
Camera Settings Section..........................................................................................................................................64
Preview Image..........................................................................................................................................................64
ARCHIVING ............................................................................................................................... 65
Benefits of Archiving.................................................................................................................................................65
How Archiving Works ...............................................................................................................................................65
Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default Archiving Directory ...............................................................66
2
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
Archiving Audio ........................................................................................................................................................66
Storage Capacity Required for Archiving .................................................................................................................66
Automatic Response if Running Out of Disk Space .................................................................................................67
Backing Up Archives ................................................................................................................................................68
Viewing Archived Recordings...................................................................................................................................69
Virus Scanning and Archiving ..................................................................................................................................69
New Database if Archiving Fails...............................................................................................................................69
Archive Setup Window .............................................................................................................................................70
Fields and Buttons....................................................................................................................................................70
Static Archiving.........................................................................................................................................................73
Dynamic Archiving....................................................................................................................................................74
What Happens During Dynamic Archiving? .............................................................................................................74
Archiving Audio ........................................................................................................................................................75
AUDIO ...................................................................................................................................... 75
Microphone Settings Window...................................................................................................................................76
Speaker Settings Window ........................................................................................................................................76
DOWNLOAD MANAGER (ACCESS CLIENT AVAILABILITY) ............................................................. 77
Examples of User-Accessible Features ...................................................................................................................77
What Does the Welcome Page Look Like?..............................................................................................................77
Initial Look ................................................................................................................................................................77
Default Configuration of Download Manager ...........................................................................................................78
Download Manager's Tree Structure Explained.......................................................................................................79
Making New Features Available...............................................................................................................................79
Installing New Features on Server ...........................................................................................................................79
Making New Features Available through the Download Manager ...........................................................................80
Hiding and Removing Features................................................................................................................................80
Virus Scanning Information ......................................................................................................................................80
GENERAL SETTINGS .................................................................................................................. 80
Administrator Settings ..............................................................................................................................................81
Manual Start Recording Settings..............................................................................................................................81
NetCentral Settings ..................................................................................................................................................81
Patrolling Settings ....................................................................................................................................................81
Logfile Settings.........................................................................................................................................................82
Event Recording Settings.........................................................................................................................................82
Advanced .................................................................................................................................................................83
Email Settings ..........................................................................................................................................................84
Sms Settings ............................................................................................................................................................84
Change Password Window ......................................................................................................................................84
How to Change the Administrator Password............................................................................................................84
NetCentral Settings Window ....................................................................................................................................85
E-Mail Setup Window ...............................................................................................................................................85
Specifying Recipients ...............................................................................................................................................86
Specifying Sender Settings ......................................................................................................................................86
Specifying Default Subject and Message Texts .......................................................................................................86
Specifying Image and Interval Options.....................................................................................................................87
Testing Your E-Mail Alert Configuration ...................................................................................................................87
IMAGE SERVER ADMINISTRATION.................................................................88
Server Configuration Section ...................................................................................................................................88
User Administration Section .....................................................................................................................................90
Master/Slave Setup Section .....................................................................................................................................91
Configuration on the Master Server .........................................................................................................................91
Configuration on a Slave Server ..............................................................................................................................91
Not Using a Master/Slave Setup ..............................................................................................................................92
3
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
Upgrading Servers in an Existing Master/Slave Setup.............................................................................................92
Log Files Section......................................................................................................................................................92
Audit Log Section .....................................................................................................................................................93
Language Support and XML Encoding Section .......................................................................................................93
Good to know: Client Access to Live Video from Stopped Cameras .......................................................................93
Local IP Ranges .......................................................................................................................................................94
Slave Servers ...........................................................................................................................................................94
Users & User Rights.................................................................................................................................................95
What Is Active Directory? .........................................................................................................................................96
How to Add a New Basic User .................................................................................................................................97
How to Add a New Windows User or Group ............................................................................................................97
How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password ....................................................................................................98
How to Remove an Existing User.............................................................................................................................98
What Information to Provide to Users ......................................................................................................................98
Define User Rights Window ...................................................................................................................................100
INPUT, EVENTS & OUTPUT............................................................................103
Types of Events......................................................................................................................................................103
Specifying Input, Events and Output ......................................................................................................................103
Using Dedicated I/O Devices .................................................................................................................................104
I/O Setup ................................................................................................................................................................104
I/O Setup Window's Defined Events List and Buttons............................................................................................105
Input Events ...........................................................................................................................................................108
Add New Event Window's Fields............................................................................................................................108
Edit Event Window .................................................................................................................................................109
Edit Event Window's Fields ....................................................................................................................................110
Multiple Input Events Window ................................................................................................................................111
Multiple Input Events Window's Fields and Buttons...............................................................................................112
Add New Event Window.........................................................................................................................................113
Add New Event Window's Fields............................................................................................................................113
Add New Output .....................................................................................................................................................114
Add New Output Window's Fields ..........................................................................................................................114
Testing the Defined Output ....................................................................................................................................115
Edit Output Window................................................................................................................................................115
Edit Output Window's Fields ..................................................................................................................................116
Testing the Defined Output ....................................................................................................................................116
Advanced Window's Fields ....................................................................................................................................117
New Timer Window ................................................................................................................................................118
New Timer Window's Fields ...................................................................................................................................118
Event Buttons (Manual Triggering).........................................................................................................................119
Event Buttons Window ...........................................................................................................................................119
Defined Events List ................................................................................................................................................120
Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events ..........................................................................................................120
Editing Event Buttons and Timer Events................................................................................................................121
Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs ..................................................................................................122
Add New Event Window.........................................................................................................................................122
Add New Event Window's Fields............................................................................................................................122
Edit Event Window .................................................................................................................................................123
Edit Event Window's Fields ....................................................................................................................................123
Generic Events.......................................................................................................................................................124
Generic Events Window's Events List and Buttons................................................................................................125
Add New Event.......................................................................................................................................................126
General Event Settings Section .............................................................................................................................126
Event Rule String Section ......................................................................................................................................128
Notification Settings Section...................................................................................................................................130
Edit Event Window .................................................................................................................................................131
4
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
General Event Settings Section .............................................................................................................................132
Event Rule String Section ......................................................................................................................................133
Notification Settings Section...................................................................................................................................136
I/O Control ..............................................................................................................................................................137
Associating Events with Particular Outputs............................................................................................................137
Output Settings for [Device Name][Camera Name] Window..................................................................................138
Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected Motion ............................................................................138
HOW TO ................................................................................................................................. 140
How to Add an Input-based Event..........................................................................................................................140
How to Add an Event Button ..................................................................................................................................141
How to Add a VMD Event.......................................................................................................................................144
How to Add a Generic Event ..................................................................................................................................145
How to Add a Timer Event .....................................................................................................................................149
How to Add a Manually Controlled Output .............................................................................................................151
How to Add a Motion-Triggered Output..................................................................................................................155
NETMATRIX ............................................................................................................................ 158
Config Tab..............................................................................................................................................................158
Event Tab ...............................................................................................................................................................160
MONITOR ................................................................................................................................ 162
RECORDING SERVER SERVICE ................................................................................................. 162
Using the Recording Server Manager ....................................................................................................................162
Starting the Recording Server Service ...................................................................................................................163
Stop the Recording Server Service ........................................................................................................................163
Opening the NetDVMS Application ........................................................................................................................164
Monitoring System Status ......................................................................................................................................164
Viewing the Recording Server Log File ..................................................................................................................165
Viewing the Image Server Log File ........................................................................................................................165
Accessing the Built-in Help System........................................................................................................................165
Viewing Information about NetDVMS.....................................................................................................................165
Exiting the Recording Server Manager ..................................................................................................................166
Pausing the Recording Server Service ..................................................................................................................166
Resuming the Recording Server Service ...............................................................................................................166
What to Do if the Recording Server Service is Stopped ........................................................................................166
SCHEDULING .......................................................................................................................... 167
Fields and Check Boxes.........................................................................................................................................168
Calendar Section....................................................................................................................................................170
How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar .........................................................................................................170
Colored Bars ..........................................................................................................................................................171
Camera/Alerts Scheduler Window's Copy and Paste Buttons ...............................................................................172
VIDEO CLIENTS...............................................................................................173
Server End: Providing Access through Clients......................................................................................................174
IMAGE SERVER ....................................................................................................................... 174
DOWNLOAD MANAGER ............................................................................................................ 174
Server End: Providing Access Through NetPDA/NetCell Client ............................................................................174
Assess Your Organization's Needs........................................................................................................................175
What is .NET? ........................................................................................................................................................175
Differences between NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS ..............................................................................................176
NETGUARD-EVS .................................................................................................................... 177
Installing NetGuard-EVS ........................................................................................................................................177
Removing NetGuard-EVS ......................................................................................................................................177
5
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
Installation ..............................................................................................................................................................177
OCULARIS CLIENT LITE ........................................................................................................... 179
Installing Ocularis Client Lite ..................................................................................................................................179
Removing Ocularis Client Lite ................................................................................................................................179
Installation ..............................................................................................................................................................179
NETGUARD ............................................................................................................................. 180
Accessing NetGuard ..............................................................................................................................................181
NETPDA/NETCELL CLIENT & SERVER .................................................................................... 182
NetPDA/NetCell Server ..........................................................................................................................................182
NetPDA/NetCell Client ...........................................................................................................................................183
Moving on ..............................................................................................................................................................183
INSTALLING IIS AND .NET FRAMEWORK .................................................................................. 183
IIS Installation.........................................................................................................................................................183
.NET Framework Verification .................................................................................................................................184
Allowing Use of .NET Framework (Windows 2003 Only) .......................................................................................185
.NET Framework Registration ................................................................................................................................186
Installing the NetPDA/NetCell Server.....................................................................................................................186
Verifying the NetPDA/NetCell Server Installation...................................................................................................188
NetPDA/NetCell Server Installation Troubleshooting .............................................................................................190
Installing the NetPDA/NetCell Client ......................................................................................................................191
Checking the Wireless Connection ........................................................................................................................191
Starting and Configuring the NetPDA/NetCell Client..............................................................................................192
Starting the NetPDA/NetCell Client ........................................................................................................................193
Logging In to the NetPDA/NetCell Client................................................................................................................193
Viewing Live Video .................................................................................................................................................193
Selecting a Camera for Live Viewing .....................................................................................................................194
Full Screen View ....................................................................................................................................................195
PTZ Control ............................................................................................................................................................195
PTZ Preset Positions..............................................................................................................................................196
Output Control ........................................................................................................................................................196
Returning to the Camera List Page ........................................................................................................................196
Viewing Recorded Video ........................................................................................................................................196
Selecting a Camera for Viewing of Recordings......................................................................................................197
Browsing and Playing Back Recorded Video .........................................................................................................197
Finding Recordings from a Specific Time and Date ...............................................................................................198
Finding Recordings from a Specific Event .............................................................................................................198
Full Screen View ....................................................................................................................................................199
Returning to the Camera List Page ........................................................................................................................199
Logging Out of the NetPDA/NetCell Client.............................................................................................................199
VIEWER ............................................................................................................200
NETMATRIX MONITOR ...................................................................................201
First Time Configuration .........................................................................................................................................203
Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix Monitor.................................................................................207
Opening the NetMatrix Monitor Window.................................................................................................................207
1×1 and 2×2 View ..................................................................................................................................................207
Camera Information................................................................................................................................................208
Image Aspect Ratios ..............................................................................................................................................209
Toggling between Regular and Full Screen View ..................................................................................................209
Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix Monitor.................................................................................209
Accepting Received Commands ............................................................................................................................209
Alerts upon Executed Commands..........................................................................................................................210
Shortcut Menus ......................................................................................................................................................210
6
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
NETMATRIX MONITOR WINDOW SHORTCUT MENU ................................................................... 211
NOTIFICATION AREA SHORTCUT MENU .................................................................................... 211
Shutting Down the NetMatrix Monitor Application ..................................................................................................212
LOGGING .........................................................................................................213
Log File Types, Locations and Names ...................................................................................................................213
Administrator Application Log Files ........................................................................................................................213
Recording Server Service Log Files.......................................................................................................................213
Event Log Files.......................................................................................................................................................213
Image Server Service Log Files .............................................................................................................................214
Image Server Service Audit Log Files ....................................................................................................................214
Web Server Log Files.............................................................................................................................................214
Image Import Service Log Files..............................................................................................................................214
Export Log Files .....................................................................................................................................................214
Log File Structures .................................................................................................................................................215
Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages......................................................................................................215
VIDEO DEVICE DRIVERS................................................................................216
Removing Old Version of Video Device Drivers.....................................................................................................216
Installing New Version of Video Device Drivers .....................................................................................................216
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME................................................................................218
SPRING: SWITCH FROM STANDARD TIME TO DST..................................................................... 218
FALL: SWITCH FROM DST TO STANDARD TIME ........................................................................ 218
VIRUS SCANNING ...........................................................................................219
3 GB SWITCHING ............................................................................................220
When Is 3 GB Switching Relevant? .......................................................................................................................220
What to Do: If Running Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003 ........................................................221
What to Do: If Running Windows 2008 Server or Windows Vista ..........................................................................221
REMOVAL ........................................................................................................223
ENTIRE SYSTEM ...................................................................................................................... 223
REMOVE INDIVIDUAL COMPONENTS ......................................................................................... 223
REMOVE NETMATRIX .............................................................................................................. 224
NetPDA/NetCell Server Removal Procedure .........................................................................................................224
NetPDA/NetCell Client Removal Procedure...........................................................................................................224
Removing the NetPDA/NetCell Client Directly from the PDA.................................................................................224
Removing the NetPDA/NetCell Client from a PC with ActiveSync.........................................................................225
HOW TO ... .......................................................................................................226
ADMINISTRATOR ..................................................................................................................... 226
Generic Events.......................................................................................................................................................228
Config Tab..............................................................................................................................................................244
Event Tab ...............................................................................................................................................................246
DATABASES............................................................................................................................ 251
Power Outages: Use a UPS...................................................................................................................................251
Windows Task Manager: Be Careful when Ending Processes ..............................................................................251
Hard Disk Failure: Protect Your Drives ..................................................................................................................252
REMOVING THE DOWNLOAD MANAGER .................................................................................... 252
7
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
Examples of User-Accessible Features .................................................................................................................252
What Does the Welcome Page Look Like?............................................................................................................253
Initial Look ..............................................................................................................................................................253
Default Configuration of Download Manager .........................................................................................................253
Download Manager's Tree Structure Explained.....................................................................................................254
Making New Features Available.............................................................................................................................255
Installing New Features on Server .........................................................................................................................255
Making New Features Available through the Download Manager .........................................................................255
Hiding and Removing Features..............................................................................................................................255
Virus Scanning Information ....................................................................................................................................256
HELP SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 256
Navigating the Built-in Help System .......................................................................................................................256
Links in Help Topics ...............................................................................................................................................257
Printing Help Topics ...............................................................................................................................................257
IMAGE SERVER ....................................................................................................................... 257
Adding a Slave Server...................................................................................... 258
Removing a Slave Server.................................................................................. 258
SLC (SOFTWARE LICENSE CODE) ..................................................... 260
Legal Notice
This product manual is intended for general information purposes only, and due care has been taken in its preparation.
Any risk arising from the use of this information rests with the recipient, and nothing herein should be construed as constituting
any kind of warranty.
OnSSI reserves the right to make adjustments without prior notification.
(C) 2009 On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc. OnSSI and the ’Eye’ logo are registered trademarks of OnSSI. Ocularis,
NetDVMS, NetEVS, NetDVR, ProSight, NetGuard, NetGuard-EVS, NetSwitcher, NetMatrix, NetTransact, NetCentral, NetPDA
and NetCell are trademarks of OnSSI. Other names are the property of their respective owners.
8
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
Welcome
NetDVMS is a powerful and intelligent surveillance solution:
•
Compatible with a wide range of different IP video products from the leading manufacturers,
so you choose the hardware you want—in combinations too
•
Dependable; with robust and stable performance proven in operation on thousands of cameras
worldwide
•
Flexible; with remote access features that let you use the surveillance system from any place
and at any time
•
Scalable; with open architecture based on IP technology with ongoing development and
regular updates, which gives you long-term returns on your surveillance investment
•
Future-safe; the IP network approach is the foundation for tomorrow—available today
Several Targeted Components in One
NetDVMS consists of a number of components, each targeted at specific tasks and user types:
•
The Administrator: The main application used by surveillance system administrators for
configuring the NetDVMS surveillance system server, upon installation or whenever
configuration adjustments are required, e.g. when adding new cameras or users to the
system.
•
The Recording Server: A vital part of the surveillance system; video streams are only
transferred to NetDVMS while the recording server is running. The recording server is
automatically installed as a service (the Recording Server service), which will run in the
background on the NetDVMS surveillance system server. You are able to manage the service
through the Recording Server Manager.
•
The Image Server: Handles access to the surveillance system for users logging in with
NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS, or NetPDA/NetCell Client. The Image Server
itself does not require separate hardware; it runs as a service on the surveillance system
server. Surveillance system administrators handle Image Server configuration, including users'
access rights, through the Image Server Administrator application.
•
The Download Manager: Lets surveillance system administrators manage which NetDVMSrelated features your organization's users will be able to access from a targeted welcome page
on the surveillance system server.
•
NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS: Choice of three types of remote access
clients, each providing users with intuitive remote access to the surveillance system.
NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS let users view live video, play back recorded
video, activate outputs, print and export evidence, etc. NetGuard is accessed straight from the
surveillance system server through an Internet Explorer browser. The extra feature-rich
Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS should always be downloaded and installed on remote
users' computers.
9
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
•
The NetPDA/NetCell Client and NetPDA/NetCell Server: Enable remote access to the
surveillance system via a PDA (Personal Digital Assistant; a hand-held computer device) with
a wireless connection.
•
NetMatrix: Enables control of live camera views on remote computers for distributed viewing.
Once configured, NetMatrix-triggered live video can be viewed in NetGuard-EVS, Ocularis
Client Lite or on computers with the NetMatrix Monitor client application installed.
To use NetDVMS's built-in help system, simply press the F1 key on your keyboard while using
NetDVMS.
When you press F1, the help system will open in a separate window, allowing you to easily switch
between help and NetDVMS itself.
The help system in is context sensitive. This means that when you press F1 for help while working in a
particular NetDVMS window, the help system automatically displays the help topic describing that
window.
Navigating the Built-in Help System
Even though the help system initially takes you to a topic describing the window you are working in,
you are always able to freely navigate between the help system's contents. To do this, simply use the
help window's three tabs: Contents, Search and Glossary, or use the links inside the help topics.
Contents Tab
The Contents tab lets you navigate the help system based on a tree structure. Many users
will be familiar with this type of navigation from, for example, Windows Explorer.
Search Tab
The Search tab lets you search for help topics containing particular terms of interest. For
example, you can search for the term camera, and every help topic containing the term
camera will be listed in the search results. Clicking a help topic title in the search results list
will open the required topic. The Search tab contains a number of advanced search features;
among these are the ability to quickly select and run previous searches, the ability to search
topic titles only as well as the ability to display search results ranked according to presumed
relevance.
Links in Help Topics
The actual content of each help topic is displayed in the right pane of the help window. Help topic
texts may contain various types of links, notably so-called expanding drop-down links.
Clicking an expanding drop-down link will display detailed information. The detailed information will be
displayed immediately below the link itself; the content on the page simply expands. Expanding dropdown links thus help save space.
10
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Welcome
If you wish to quickly collapse all texts from expanding drop-down links in a help topic, simply click
the title of the topic on the help system's Contents tab.
Printing Help Topics
To print a help topic, navigate to the required topic and click the help window's Print button. When you
click the Print button, a dialog box may ask you whether you wish to print the selected topic only or all
topics under the selected heading. When this is the case, select Print the selected topic and click OK.
Tip: When printing a selected help topic, the topic will be printed as you see it on your screen.
Therefore, if a topic contains expanding drop-down links (see Links in Help Topics above), click each
required drop-down link to display the text in order for it to be included in your printout. This allows
you to create targeted printouts, containing exactly the amount of information you require.
11
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
System Requirements
System Requirements
The following are minimum system requirements for running NetDVMS and associated applications:
NetDVMS Surveillance System Server
Operating
System
Microsoft® Windows® 2008 Server (32 bit or 64 bit*), Windows Server
2003 (32 bit or 64 bit*), Windows Vista® Business (32 bit or 64 bit*),
Windows Vista Enterprise (32 bit or 64 bit*), Windows Vista Ultimate
(32 bit or 64 bit*), Windows XP Professional (32 bit or 64 bit*).
CPU
Intel® Pentium® 4, 2.4 GHz or higher (CoreTM 2 recommended).
RAM
Minimum 1 GB (2 GB or more recommended).
Network
Ethernet (1 Gbit recommended).
Hard Disk Type
E-IDE, PATA, SATA, SCSI, SAS (7200 RPM or faster).
Hard Disk Space
Minimum 80 Gbyte free (depends on number of cameras and recording
settings).
Software
DirectX 9.0 or newer required to run Playback Viewer application.
Microsoft .NET 1.1 Framework required to run Recording Server
Manager. Microsoft .NET 2.0 is required for the NVR Download
Manager.
To run Ocularis Client Lite, the following is required: Microsoft Windows
XP Professional or Microsoft Vista, Microsoft .NET framework, Intel Core
2 Quad CPU 2.83 GHz, 4 GB RAM and an ATI Radeon HD 2400 XT.
To run the NetPDA/NetCell Server, the following is required: Internet
Information Server (IIS) 5.1 or newer as well as Microsoft video
Framework 1.1.
* Running as a 32 bit service/application.
Tip: To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer, click Start, select Run...,
and type dxdiag. When you click OK, the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open; version
information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab. Should the server require a
DirectX update, the latest versions of DirectX are available from
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/
Tip: Information about how to verify/install Microsoft video Framework and IIS versions is
available in Installing & Configuring the NetPDA/NetCell Server.
12
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
System Requirements
NetGuard-EVS
Operating
System
Microsoft Windows XP Professional (32 bit or 64 bit*) and Windows
Server 2003 (32 bit or 64 bit*), Windows Vista Business (32 bit or 64
bit*), Windows Vista Enterprise (32 bit or 64 bit*) and Windows Vista
Ultimate (32 bit or 64 bit*).
CPU
Intel Core2™ Duo, minimum 2.4 GHz or higher.
RAM
Minimum 512 MB (1 GB recommended for larger views, 1 GB
recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista).
Network
Ethernet (100 Mbit or higher recommended).
Graphics
Adapter
AGP or PCI-Express, minimum 1024 x 768 (1280 x 1024
recommended), 16 bit colors.
Hard Disk Space
Minimum 100 MB free.
Software
Microsoft .NET 2.0 Framework and DirectX 9.0 or newer.
* Running as a 32 bit service/application.
Tip: To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer, click Start, select Run...,
and type dxdiag. When you click OK, the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open; version
information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab. Should the server require a
DirectX update, the latest versions of DirectX are available from
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/.
Ocularis Client Lite
Operating
System
Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Windows Vista Ultimate
CPU
Intel Core2™ Duo, minimum 2.4 GHz or higher.
RAM
Minimum 1 GB
Network
Ethernet (100 Mbit or higher recommended).
Graphics
Adapter
PCI-Express, 256 MB RAM, Direct 3D support
NetGuard
Operating
System
Microsoft Windows XP Professional (32 bit or 64 bit*) and Windows
Server 2003 (32 bit or 64 bit*), Windows Vista Business (32 bit or 64
bit*), Windows Vista Enterprise (32 bit or 64 bit*) and Windows Vista
Ultimate (32 bit or 64 bit*).
CPU
Intel Pentium 4, 2.4 GHz or higher.
RAM
Minimum 256 MB (512 MB recommended for larger views, 1 GB
13
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
System Requirements
recommended on Microsoft Windows Vista).
Network
Ethernet (100 Mbit or higher recommended).
Graphics
Adapter
AGP or PCI-Express, minimum 1024 x 768 (1280 x 1024
recommended), 16 bit colors.
Hard Disk Space
Minimum 10 MB free.
Software
DirectX 9.0 or newer.
* Running as a 32 bit service/application.
Tip: To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer, click Start, select Run...,
and type dxdiag. When you click OK, the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will open; version
information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab. Should the server require a
DirectX update, the latest versions of DirectX are available from
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/.
NetPDA/NetCell Server
The NetPDA/NetCell Server is typically installed on the surveillance system server; see the
system requirements for the surveillance system server.
Note, however, that to run the NetPDA/NetCell Server the following is also required on the
surveillance system server:
•
Internet Information Services (IIS) 5.0 or later
•
Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1.
Note that later versions of. Net Framework may also be present on the server. If .NET
Framework 1.1 as well as one or more later versions are present on the server, Windows'
default settings may cause a later .NET Framework version to be used instead of .NET
Framework 1.1. To verify/change which .NET Framework version is used, do the following:
1.
Click Start and select Control Panel.
2.
Click Administrative Tools.
3.
Click Internet Information Services.
4.
In the Internet Information Services window's left pane, locate and right-click the
Default Web Site item:
Example only; content on
your server may be different
5.
In the resulting menu, select Properties. This will open the Default Web Site Properties
dialog.
14
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
6.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
System Requirements
Select the dialog's ASP.NET tab.
The .NET Framework in use will be indicated in the ASP.NET version field.
7.
If required, change the ASP.NET version to 1.1.4322:
Example only.
8. Click OK.
9. Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open.
NetPDA/NetCell Client
Operating
System
Microsoft Windows Pocket PC 2003/2003 SE/Mobile 5.0.
CPU
Intel StrongARM or 100% compatible.
RAM
Minimum 32 MB.
Network
Ethernet (256 Kbit or higher recommended)
Graphics
Adapter
Minimum 320 x 200, 16 bit colors.
Software
Microsoft Windows Pocket PC 2003/2003 SE/Mobile 5.0.
NetMatrix Monitor
Operating
System
Microsoft Windows XP Professional (32 bit or 64 bit*) and
Windows Server 2003 (32 bit or 64 bit*), Windows Vista
Business (32 bit or 64 bit*), Windows Vista Enterprise (32 bit
or 64 bit*) and Windows Vista Ultimate (32 bit or 64 bit*).
CPU
Intel Pentium 4, 2.4 GHz or higher.
RAM
Minimum 512 Mbyte (1 GB recommended on Microsoft
Windows Vista).
Network
Ethernet (100 Mbit or higher recommended).
Graphics
AAGP or PCI-Express, minimum 1024 x 768, 16 bit colors.
15
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
System Requirements
Adapter
Hard Disk
Space
Minimum 50 Mbyte free.
Software
DirectX 9.0 or newer
* Running as a 32 bit service/application.
Tip: To check which DirectX version is installed on a computer, click Start, select
Run..., and type dxdiag. When you click OK, the DirectX Diagnostic Tool window will
open; version information is displayed near the bottom of its System tab. Should the
server require a DirectX update, the latest versions of DirectX are available from
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/.
If you wish to install, configure and run NetDVMS on a Windows Vista computer, it is important that
you have administrator rights. If you only have standard user rights, you will not be able to configure
the surveillance system.
The restrictions are applied by the so-called User Account Control, a security component in Windows
Vista. Note, however, that it is possible to disable User Account Control. For more information, search
www.microsoft.com for Vista User Account Control or similar.
NetDVMS uses particular ports when communicating with other computers, cameras, etc.
What is a port? A port is a logical endpoint for data traffic. Networks use different ports for
different types of data traffic. Therefore it is sometimes, but not always, necessary to specify which
port to use for particular data communication. Most ports are used automatically based on the types of
data included in the communication. On TCP/IP networks, port numbers range from 0 to 65536, but
only ports 0 to 1024 are reserved for particular purposes. For example, port 80 is used for HTTP traffic
which is used when viewing web pages.
When using NetDVMS, make sure that the following ports are open for data traffic on your network:
•
Port 20 and 21 (inbound and outbound): Used for FTP traffic. FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
is a standard for exchanging files across networks. FTP uses the TCP/IP standards for data
transfer, and is often used for uploading or downloading files to and from servers.
•
Port 25 (inbound and outbound): Used for SMTP traffic. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer
Protocol) is a standard for sending e-mail messages between servers. This port should be
open since, depending on configuration, some cameras may send images to the surveillance
system server via e-mail.
•
Port 80 (inbound and outbound): Used for HTTP traffic between the surveillance server
and cameras, NetGuard and/or NetGuard-EVS, and the default communication port for the
surveillance system's Image Server. HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is a standard for
exchanging files across networks; widely used for formatting and transmission of data on the
world wide web.
•
Port 1024 and above (outbound only): Used for HTTP traffic between cameras and the
surveillance server.
•
Any other port numbers you may have selected to use, for example if you have changed the
Image Server's port from its default port number (80) to another port number.
Tip: Consult the administrator of your organization's firewall if in doubt about how to open ports for
traffic.
16
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
System Requirements
All images are time-stamped by NetDVMS upon reception, but since cameras are separate units which
may have separate timing devices, power supplies, etc., camera time and NetDVMS system time may
not correspond fully, and this may occasionally lead to confusion.
If supported by your cameras, we thus recommend you auto-synchronize camera and system time
through a time server for consistent synchronization.
For information about configuring a time server searching www.microsoft.com for time server, time
service, or similar.
17
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Installation
Installation
If you wish to install, configure and run NetDVMS on a Windows Vista computer, it is important that
you have administrator rights. If you only have standard user rights, you will not be able to configure
the surveillance system.
The restrictions are applied by the so-called User Account Control, a security component in Windows
Vista. Note, however, that it is possible to disable User Account Control. For more information, search
www.microsoft.com for Vista User Account Control or similar.
Note: Do not install NetDVMS on a mounted drive (i.e. a drive attached to an empty folder on an
NTFS (NT File System) volume, with a label or name instead of a drive letter). If using mounted
drives, critical system features may not work as intended; you will, for example, not receive any
warnings if the system runs out of disk space.
Prerequisites: Shut down any existing software. If upgrading, read Upgrading from a Previous
Version first.
1.
Insert the NetDVMS software DVD, wait for a short while, select required language, then click
the Install NetDVMS link.
Alternatively, if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet, run the
downloaded installation file from the location you have saved it to.
Tip: Depending on your security settings, you may receive one or more security warnings
(Do you want to run or save this file?, Do you want to run this software? or similar). When
this is the case, click the Run button.
2.
When the installation wizard starts, click Next to continue.
3.
Read and accept the End User License Agreement, then click Next.
4.
If an earlier NetDVMS version (6.0a or later) is present on the server, you will be asked to
accept that it is automatically removed during installation of the new version. The automatic
removal will not delete any existing recordings or configuration. If asked, we recommend
answering Yes, since this will ensure that old versions will not interfere with your new version.
Note that NetDVMS versions earlier than 6.0 must be removed manually before installing the
new version, see Upgrading from a Previous Version.
Select Typical installation (advanced users can select Custom installation, and choose which features
to install and where to install them).
5.
Select the Install licensed Version option, and specify your user name, organization, and
Software License Code (SLC; printed on your Product License Sheet). When ready, click Next.
6.
Click the Install button to begin the software installation. During the process, all the necessary
components will be installed one after the other.
8.
Click Finish on the last step to complete the installation.
•
NetDVMS's Administrator window may appear on your screen during installation.
When this is the case, the window will automatically close again after a short while.
18
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Installation
If a Status Information window appears on your screen during installation, simply
click its OK button. The window simply provides a summary of your installation.
When installation is complete, you can begin configuring your NetDVMS solution: Double-click the
Administrator desktop shortcut or select Start > All Programs > NetDVMS > Administrator to open the
Administrator window.
Tip: If you want to make additional language versions of Ocularis Client Lite, NetGuard-EVS and
NetGuard (such as Spanish, French, or Japanese versions) available to your organization's users, you
can quickly do this once you have installed NetDVMS. See more in the description of the Download
Manager.
Upgrading
Upgrading NetDVMS is an easy task, and you need not worry about spending hours reconfiguring your
software.
The following information applies if upgrading from one NetDVMS version to another as well as if
upgrading to NetDVMS from a lower product in the product portfolio.
Prerequisites
•
Take note of your SLC (Software License Code). The SLC will change when the
software version number changes.
•
If your SLC has changed, so have your DLKs (Device License Keys). Contact your
NetDVMS vendor to get new DLKs. You will typically receive the new DLKs in a single
.dlk file; save it on the computer running the NetDVMS server.
•
If you do not already have the new NetDVMS version, contact your NetDVMS vendor
to get he most current version, which you are allowed to install with your SLC.
Backing Up Your Current Configuration
It is generally a good idea to make regular backups of your server configuration as a disaster recovery
measure. Upgrading your server is no exception. While it is rare to lose your configuration (cameras,
schedules, views, etc), it can happen under certain circumstances. Luckily, it takes only a minute to
back up your existing configuration:
1.
Create a folder called Backup on the desktop of your NetDVMS server, on a network drive,
or on removable media.
2.
Open My Computer, and navigate to the NetDVMS installation folder.
3.
Copy the following files and folders into your Backup folder:
•
All configuration (.ini) files
•
All scheduling (.sch) files
•
The file users.txt (not found in most installations)
19
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Installation
Folders with a name ending in ...ViewGroups
Note that the folders may not exist if upgrading from old software versions.
Removing the Current Version
NetDVMS versions 6.0a or later can automatically be removed during installation of the new
version. When installing the new version, simply answer Yes if asked if you accept such
automatic removal. The automatic removal will not delete any existing recordings or
configuration.
NetDVMS versions older than 6.0 as well as lower products in the product portfolio must be
removed manually before installing the new version. Manually removing the old version
involves removing two components on the server. Removing these components will not
remove your configuration files.
1. From Windows’ Start menu, select Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2. Remove NetDVMS (or the lower product).
3. When asked if you want to remove database files or registry settings, you should normally
not select any of the check boxes.
You may choose to remove database files if you wish, but removing registry settings may
mean that the new software version will not be able to utilize the existing configuration.
4. Remove Video Device Driver/Pack Vx.x (where x.x refers to the version number).
Installing the New Version
Once the old version of the software is removed, you can run the installation file for the new
software version. Select the installation options that best fit your needs.
There are some recent software changes that you should be aware of:
•
It is now possible to install the software as a service, and as of NetDVMS 6.5 this is
the only option since the Monitor application has been discontinued. When the
software runs as a service, the Recording Server runs as a background process, and
any viewing either locally or remotely will be done through either NetPDA/NetCell
Client, Ocularis Client Lite, NetGuard-EVS or NetGuard.
•
The HTTP Server/Realtime Feed Server (very basic alternative to NetGuardEVS/NetGuard) can only be used when the software is installed as an application.
Since installing as an application is no longer possible in current NetDVMS versions,
the HTTP Server and Realtime Feed Server have been discontinued. Use the much
superior Ocularis Client Lite, NetGuard-EVS or NetGuard instead.
•
NetDVMS's Administrator window may appear on your screen during installation.
When this is the case, the window will automatically close again after a short while.
•
In the most recent software version, a Download Manager is introduced, and you will
have the option of opening the Download Manager during installation. The Download
Manager is used for managing which features your organization's users will be able to
access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server. You can
open the Download Manager if you like, but you can just as easily make changes
through the Download Manager once installation is completed.
20
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Installation
Restoring a Configuration Backup (if Required)
If for some reason after installing the new software version you have lost your old
configuration, you can easily restore your configuration, provided you have created a backup
of your configuration prior to upgrading the software:
1.
Drag and drop the backed-up configuration files and folders into the new installation
directory.
2.
When asked if you wish to overwrite the existing files, click Yes.
3.
Restart your server.
Updating Video Device Drivers
Video drivers are small programs used for controlling/communicating with the camera devices
connected to an NetDVMS system.
Video drivers are installed automatically during the installation of your NetDVMS system.
However, new versions of the video drivers, also called Driver Packs, are released from time
to time.
We therefore recommend that you visit www.onssi.com and download the latest Driver Pack.
Upgrading NetGuard-EVS
NetGuard-EVS users should now remove their old NetGuard-EVS versions and install the new
one:
1.
On the required computers, open Windows' Add or Remove Programs dialog (Start >
Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs).
2.
In the Add or Remove Programs dialog, select the NetGuard-EVS entry, and click the
Remove button. A wizard window will open. Follow the wizard's steps, and click Finish
when ready.
3.
Now open a browser and connect to NetDVMS at the following address:
http://[IP address or hostname of server]:[Image Server port number; default is 80]
Example: http://123.123.123.123:80
4.
From the welcome page that appears, download and install the latest NetGuard-EVS
version.
5.
If required, download and install any NetGuard-EVS plugins needed.
21
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Administration
For users without administrator rights, access to certain features in NetDVMS may in some
organizations have been restricted.
When this is the case, you will be asked to specify the administrator password in the Administrator
Login window in order to get access to the restricted features.
The Administrator Login window
You will only be asked to specify the administrator password when you open the Administrator
application, by selecting it from Windows' Start menu or by clicking the Administrator shortcut on the
desktop. This will only be the case when access to the Administrator application has been passwordprotected.
Administrator Window
The Administrator window, the main window in the Administrator application, is used by the
surveillance system administrator for configuring NetDVMS upon installation or whenever configuration
adjustments are required, e.g. when adding new cameras to the system.
Access: You access the Administrator application by selecting it from Window's Start menu or
by clicking the Administrator desktop shortcut. Access to the Administrator application may be
password protected, in which case you will be asked to provide the administrator password in the
Administrator Login window.
IMPORTANT: Changes you make in the Administrator application are not applied on your surveillance
system until you exit the Administrator application. This allows you to try out various settings before
making them take effect.
The Administrator window's Device Manager section provides an overview of devices on your
surveillance system; the window's buttons let you configure your system.
Device Manager Section
The Device Manager section—located in the middle of the Administrator window—lists all added
devices with attached cameras, microphones and speakers. The Device Manager section thus provides
you with an overview of your surveillance system.
22
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Detail from the Administrator window's Device Manager section—two
devices have been added; the first device has a single camera
attached, whereas the second device has four cameras attached
Until you have added devices, the Device Manager section will be empty.
Adding Devices
You add devices through an intuitive Device Setup Wizard, available by clicking the
Administrator window’s Add Device button (see also How to Add a Device). When devices have
been added, they will be listed in the Device Manager section. Clicking the plus sign next to
a device in the Device Manager section will list cameras attached to the device.
Editing Settings for Devices
To edit settings for a device listed in the Device Manager section, select the device, then click
the Edit device... button to open the Edit device settings window.
Editing Settings for Cameras
To edit the settings for a camera listed in the Device Manager section, click the plus sign
next to the device to which the camera is attached, select the required camera, then click the
Settings button to open the Camera Settings for [Device name] [Camera Name] window.
Renaming a Camera
To rename a camera, right-click the camera name in question, then select Edit from the menu
that appears:
This will open the Camera Name and Number window, in which you are able to overwrite the
existing camera name with a new one.
23
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Assigning Shortcut Numbers to Cameras
Users of NetGuard-EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard shortcuts, some of which
let the users toggle between viewing different cameras. Such keyboard shortcuts include
numbers, which are used to identify each camera. Shortcut numbers must be unique for each
camera. To assign a shortcut number to a camera, right-click the camera name in question,
then select Edit from the menu that appears:
This will open the Camera Name and Number window, in which you are able to specify a
shortcut number to be used with the camera.
Note: Camera shortcut numbers are only used in NetGuard-EVS. In other applications, such
as Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard, the camera shortcuts cannot be used.
Tip: More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in the documentation
for NetGuard-EVS.
Editing Settings for Audio Sources
To edit the settings for an audio source (i.e. a microphone or a speaker) listed in the Device
Manager section, click the plus sign
next to the device to which the audio source is
attached, select the required audio source, then click the Settings button to open the
Microphone Settings window or the Speaker Settings window.
IMPORTANT: The use of microphones will impact the database capacity for storing video; see
Important Information about Using Audio for more information.
Disabling/Enabling Cameras and Audio Sources
Individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager section are by default
enabled, meaning that video from cameras and audio from attached audio sources is by
default transferred to NetDVMS—provided that the cameras are marked as online in the
Camera/Alert Scheduler window (also default).
Note: On some devices, audio can also be enabled/disabled on the device itself, typically
through the device's own configuration web page. If audio on a device does not work after
enabling it in the Administrator application, you should thus verify whether the problem may
be due to audio being disabled on the device itself.
24
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
If required, you can disable individual cameras and audio sources listed in the Device Manager
section. When a camera or audio source is disabled, no video/audio will be transferred from
the camera/audio source to NetDVMS.
To disable a camera or audio source, right-click the required camera or audio source in the
Device Manager section, then select Disable:
When a camera or audio source is disabled, it will be indicated as follows:
To enable a previously disabled camera or audio source, simply right-click the required camera
or audio source in the Device Manager section, then select Enable:
Tip: Individual cameras can also be disabled/enabled in the Camera Settings for [Device
Name] [Camera Name] Window. Individual audio sources can also be disabled/enabled in the
Microphone Settings window or Speaker Settings window respectively.
Administrator Window's Buttons
The Administrator window features the following buttons:
Button
Description
Service
Manager...
Opens the Service Manager window, which lets you pause/resume
the Recording Server service. Pausing the service is necessary in
order to access some features, for example configuration of PTZ
(Pan/Tilt/Zoom) cameras.
IMPORTANT: While the service is paused, no video or audio will
be recorded.
Scheduler...
Opens the Camera/Alert Scheduler window, in which you specify
online periods for each camera.
You are also able to specify if cameras should go online when
specific events occur (e.g. when a door is opened), and if e-mail or
sound alerts should be used if motion is detected during specific
periods of time (e.g. during working hours).
If using PTZ cameras with patrolling, you are furthermore able to
specify if certain patrol schemes should be used during specific
periods of time.
25
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
Tip: By default, all cameras are online at all times. You will only
need to modify scheduler settings if you require cameras to be
online only at specific times or events, or if you want to use
specific alerts or PTZ patrol schemes.
General
Settings...
Archive
Setup...
Opens the General Settings window, in which you are able to
specify a number of settings related to:
•
Administrator password
•
User rights for the Administrator application
•
NetCentral settings
•
PTZ patrolling pause time out (if using PTZ cameras with
patrolling)
•
E-mail settings (for alerts sent via e-mail)
•
SMS settings (for alerts sent via SMS)
•
Log file settings
•
Other advanced settings
Opens the Archive setup window, in which you specify NetDVMS's
archiving settings.
Archiving lets you keep recordings for as long as required, limited
only be the available hardware storage capacity.
Import
DLKs...
Lets you import all required Device License Keys (DLKs) in one go,
thus avoiding the need to specify each DLK manually when adding
devices.
See also How to Import Device License Keys.
NetMatrix...
Lets you access NetMatrix configuration. NetMatrix is an integrated
product for forcing video from any camera to any monitor on a
network operating with NetDVMS.
NetTransact...
Note: The NetTransact button is not functional. If NetTransact
(add-on product for handling loss prevention through video
evidence combined with time-linked POS or ATM NetTransaction
data) is installed on the server, use Windows' Start menu or the
NetTransact Administrator desktop shortcut to access the
NetTransact Administrator. Use with NetTransact versions earlier
than 2.1 is not supported.
Add Device...
Starts the Device Setup Wizard, which guides you through the
process of adding a new device.
26
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
See also How to Add a Device.
Edit Device...
When you have selected a device in the Administrator window's
Device Manager section, clicking the Edit Device... button lets you
edit settings for the selected device in the Edit device settings
window.
Remove
Device
Lets you remove a device selected in the Administrator window's
Device Manager section.
In order to prevent accidental removal of devices, you will be
asked to confirm that you want to remove the device.
Settings...
I/O Setup...
Lets you specify settings for a selected camera or audio source:
•
Cameras: When you have selected a camera in the
Administrator window's Device Manager section, clicking
the Settings button will open the Camera Settings for
[Device Name] [Camera Name]... window, in which you
specify camera settings.
•
Audio sources: When you have selected an audio source in
the Administrator window's Device Manager section,
clicking the Settings button will open the Microphone
Settings window (if the selected audio source is a
microphone) or Speaker Settings window (if the selected
source is a speaker), in which you can enable/disable the
audio source and change its name if required.
Opens the I/O Setup window, in which you are able to define
events based on input events (for example when a door sensor
detects that a door is opened) and VMD (Video Motion Detection).
The I/O Setup window also lets you specify output (e.g. a siren).
When defined, events can be used for a variety of purposes. For
example, an input event can be used for triggering output, for
starting a particular camera, and for triggering that an e-mail or
SMS message is sent to a particular user, notifying the user of the
recorded event.
See also the description of the I/O Control... button.
Event
Buttons...
Opens the Event Buttons window, in which you are able to define
events for use on event buttons.
Event buttons can used in NetGuard-EVS for manually triggering
events.
27
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Button
Description
Generic
Events...
Opens the Generic Events window, in which you are able to define
events based on input from external sources using the TCP and
UDP protocols.
I/O Control...
Opens the I/O Control window, in which you are able to attach
outputs to input events.
This way you can, for example, define that a siren should sound
when a sensor detects that a door is opened.
Exit
Closes the Administrator application.
Tip: Clicking the icon in the left corner of the Administrator window's title bar, gives you
access to a small menu. Selecting About Adm ... from the menu will display a dialog with your
system's version number and software license code; this is valuable information, should you
ever need to contact product support.
28
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Devices & DLKs
You must have a Device License Key (DLK) for every device (IP network camera or IP video server)
installed on your NetDVMS surveillance system.
Remember that you are allowed to install and use only the number of cameras listed on your
organization's license sheet; regardless of you number of available DLKs. For example, a fully used
four-port video encoder counts as four cameras even though the cameras are connected through a
single device—therefore a fully used four-port video encoder will use four licenses.
System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process.
You are able to specify each DLK manually when adding a device through the Device Setup Wizard,
available by clicking the Add Device... button in the Administrator window. However, you can avoid
having to specify each DLK manually by using the following procedure to import all received DLKs into
NetDVMS in one go:
Prerequisites: The DLKs, received in a .dlk file, must have been saved at a location accessible by the
surveillance server, for example on a network drive or on a USB stick.
1.
Open the Administrator window.
2.
In the Administrator window, click the Import DLKs... button.
3.
Browse to the location at which you have saved the received .dlk file.
Select the file, and click Open.
All DLKs are now automatically imported, and the relevant DLK will automatically appear when
you add a device through the Device Setup Wizard.
How To Add A Device
In NetDVMS you add devices (IP video camera devices, IP video encoder devices or digital video
recorder (DVR) devices) rather than actual cameras. This is because devices have their own IP
addresses or host names. Being IP-based, NetDVMS primarily identifies units on the surveillance
system based on their IP addresses or host names.
Even though each device has its own IP address or host name, several cameras can be attached to a
single device and thus share the same IP address or host name. This is typically the case with
cameras attached to video encoder devices or DVR devices. You can of course configure and use each
camera individually, even when several cameras are attached to a single device.
In addition to camera devices, video encoder devices and DVR devices, it is possible to add a number
of dedicated I/O (input/output) devices to NetDVMS. When such I/O devices are added, they can be
used in events-based system setup in the same way as a camera. For more information about using
I/O devices, see Using Dedicated I/O Devices. For information about which I/O devices are supported,
refer to the release note.
Once a device is added in NetDVMS, any cameras attached to the device are automatically recognized
by the software, and listed in the Administrator window's Device Manager section:
29
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Detail from the Administrator window's Device Manager section—two
devices have been added; the first device has a single camera
attached, whereas the second device has four cameras attached
To add a device, use the following procedure:
Prerequisites: You must have configured IP address, password, etc. on the device itself, as described
by the manufacturer.
1.
Open the Administrator window.
2.
In the Administrator window, click the Add Device... button. This will start the Device Setup
Wizard.
3.
On the first step of the wizard, identify the required device, either by
•
Typing the IP address of the device.
Tip: To jump to the next IP address segment in
the field, press SPACE on your keyboard.
- or -
•
Typing the DNS host name of the device. This requires that you select the Use DNS
host names box
Specifying the IP address of a device
Note: By default, HTTP port 80 and FTP port 21 will be used for the device. If the device you
are adding uses other port numbers, click the Port Setup button and specify required port
numbers. The need for specifying different ports may often apply if the device is located
behind a NAT-enabled router or a firewall. When this is the case, also remember to configure
the router/firewall so it maps the ports and IP address used by the device.
When ready, click Next to go to the second step of the wizard.
4.
If a password is used for the device, type the password for the device's administrator account
(called the “admin” or “root” account on some devices). Leave the Autodetect Device option
selected, then click Next.
5.
When the device has been detected, type the Device License Key (DLK) for the device in the
DLK field.
30
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Specifying DLK for the device
Tip: If you have imported DLKs (see How to Import Device License Keys), the DLK field will
already be filled with the DLK for the device.
Click Next.
6.
Assign a unique and descriptive name to the device. Upon completion of the wizard, the name
will be used when listing devices and associated cameras in the Administrator window's Device
Manager section. The name may, for example, refer to the physical location of the camera(s)
attached to the device.
Assigning a name to the device
Tip: You may click the Camera Setup button to access the Camera Settings for … window,
in which you are able to specify certain settings related to camera name and PTZ control. The
latter requires that the camera is a PTZ (Pan/tilt/Zoom) camera.
7.
Click Finish.
8.
The device will be listed in the Administrator window's Device Manager section. To view a list
of cameras attached to the device, click the plus sign
next to the device name.
Tip: Cameras are listed for each device with default names, such as Camera 1, etc. If you
want to change the name of a camera, right-click the camera name in question, then select
Edit from the menu that appears.
Tip: Individual cameras listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled,
meaning that video from the cameras are by default transferred to NetDVMS—provided that
the cameras are marked as online in the Camera/Alert Scheduler Window (also default). If
required, you can disable a camera listed in the Device Manager section by right-clicking the
name of the camera in question. See more information under Administrator window.
31
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Edit Device Settings Window
The Edit device settings window lets you edit the settings of an already installed device.
The Edit device settings window
Access: To access the Edit device settings window, select the required device in the Administrator
window's Device Manager section, and click the Edit Device... button.
The Edit device settings window is divided into two sections:
Identify Video Device Section
The Identify Video Device section contains the following fields, buttons, etc.:
Field,
Button, ...
Description
Device Type
Select required device type from list.
Tip: NetDVMS is able to automatically detect device type as well
as serial number, provided the IP address/hostname and password
of the device have been specified in the IP-address/DNS Host Name
and Root Password fields: Simply click the Detect Device button to
auto-detect device type and serial number.
Detect
Device
Click button to auto-detect device type and serial number.
Device
Name
Name used to identify the device.
Note: Use of the auto-detect feature requires that the IP address
and password of the device have been specified in the IP-address
and Root Password fields.
Tip: To enable easy identification of devices, it is often a good
32
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field,
Button, ...
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
idea to use a device name that refers to the physical area covered
by the cameras attached to the device (examples: Reception Area,
Car Park B, Entrance Door, ...).
Note: Device names must be unique; you cannot use the same
name for several devices.
Camera
Settings...
Opens the Camera Settings for [Device Name] window, in which you
are able to specify a number of settings for cameras attached to the
device, including:
•
Port through which PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) cameras are
controlled
•
Camera names, types, and ports
Note: The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for
[Device Name] window may be limited if cameras are not PTZ
cameras or connected to a video encoder device.
Device
Serial
Number
Serial number of device; usually identical to the 12-character MAC
address of the device (example: 0123456789AF).
Tip: NetDVMS is able to automatically detect serial number as
well as device type, provided the IP address/host name and
password of the device have been specified in the IP-address/DNS
Host Name and Root Password fields: Simply click the Detect Device
button to auto-detect device type and serial number.
Device
License Key
A 16-character license key (DLK) for the device, obtained when
registering the software.
Enable
Fisheye
Enables the use of fisheye, a technology that allows viewing of 360degree panoramic images.
Note: Use of the fisheye technology requires either a dedicated
fisheye camera or a regular camera equipped with a special fisheye
camera lens for which a special fisheye license key is required. If the
device in question is for a dedicated fisheye camera, the check box
is selected by default, and you do not have to enter a fisheye license
key in the neighboring field.
Fisheye
License Key
License key for using the fisheye technology; obtained when
registering the software.
Note: This information is only required if the Enable Fisheye check
box is selected manually.
33
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Network Settings for Video Device Section
The Network Settings for Video Device section contains the following fields:
Field
Description
IP-address
IP address or DNS host name of the device in question.
-or-
Note: If Use DNS host name check box is selected, the name
of the IP-address field changes to DNS/Host Name in order to
accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address.
DNS Host
Name
Use DNS
host name
By selecting the check box you are able to use a DNS host
name for identifying the device instead of using the device's
IP address. When the check box is selected, the IP-address
field changes its name to DNS/Host Name, ready to
accommodate a DNS host name rather than an IP address.
Default
Http Port
When selected, HTTP traffic to the device will go through the
default port, port 80. If you want to use another port for HTTP
traffic to the device, clear the check box, and specify required
port number in the field to the left of the check box.
Default Ftp
Port
When selected, FTP traffic to the device will go through the
default port, port 21. If you want to use another port for FTP
traffic to the device, clear the check box, and specify required
port number in the field to the left of the check box.
Root
Password
Password required in order to log in to the device using the
root account (occasionally known as an admin or
administrator account).
Note: The number of settings available in the Camera Settings for [Device Name] window may be
limited if cameras are not PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) cameras or connected to a video encoder device.
The Camera Settings for [Device Name] window lets you specify certain information about a device's
cameras. This is primarily interesting for PTZ cameras and cameras attached to a video encoder
device.
34
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
The Camera Settings for [Device Name] window
Access: You access the Camera Settings for [Device Name] window by clicking the Camera
Settings... button in the Edit device settings window.
The Camera Settings for [Device Name] window is divided into a P/T/Z Camera Selection section and
a camera list:
P/T/Z Camera Selection Section
The P/T/Z Camera selection section contains the following fields:
Field
Description
Some of the
connected
cameras are
Pan/Tilt/Zoom
cameras
Select check box if any of the cameras attached to the video
encoder device is a PTZ camera.
P/T/Z type
controlled
through COM1
Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are
Pan/Tilt/Zoom cameras check box is selected.
If the check box is not available, PTZ is not supported for the
device in question.
If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM1 port on the video
encoder device, select the required PTZ camera type from the list.
If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM1 port, select
None.
P/T/Z type
controlled
through COM2
Field available only if Some of the connected cameras are
Pan/Tilt/Zoom cameras check box is selected.
If a PTZ camera is controlled through the COM2 port on the video
encoder device, select the required PTZ camera type from the list.
If no PTZ cameras are controlled through the COM2 port, select
None.
35
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Camera List and Fields
The camera list contains a line for each camera channel on the device. First line from the top
corresponds to camera channel 1, second line from the top corresponds to camera channel 2, etc.
To change camera settings, select the required camera channel from the list, specify required
information in the following fields, and click the Apply button:
Field
Description
Camera
Name
Name used to identify the selected camera.
Existing names, such as the default camera names Camera 1,
Camera 2, etc. can be changed by overwriting the existing names.
Note: Camera names must be unique for each device.
Cam
Number
Users of the NetGuard-EVS can take advantage of a range of
keyboard shortcuts, some of which let the users toggle between
viewing different cameras. Such shortcuts include numbers, which
are used to identify each camera.
Camera shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera, must
not contain any letters or special characters, and must be no longer
than eight digits. Examples of correct camera shortcut numbers: 3,
12345678. Examples of incorrect camera shortcut numbers: A*3,
123456789.
Note: Camera shortcut numbers are only used in the NetGuard-EVS.
In other applications, such as the NetGuard, the camera shortcuts
cannot be used.
Tip: You can also assign shortcut numbers to cameras in the
Camera Name and Number window.
Tip: More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is
available in the documentation for the NetGuard-EVS.
Camera
Type
Device Port
Lets you select whether the camera on the selected camera channel
is Fixed or Moveable:
•
Fixed: Camera mounted in a fixed position
•
Moveable: PTZ camera
Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field.
Lets you select which control port on the video encoder should be
used for controlling PTZ functionality on the camera.
Port
Address
Available only if Moveable is selected in the Camera Type field.
36
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
Lets you specify port address of the camera.
The port address would normally be 0 or 1. If using daisy chained
PTZ cameras, the port address will identify each of them, and you
should verify your settings with those recommended in the cameras'
manuals.
Cameras
In NetDVMS you do not have to worry about having to add individual cameras to the system:
Cameras are connected to devices, so once you have added the required devices to your NetDVMS
system (see How to Add a Device), all cameras connected to the devices are connected to the system
as well.
You are able to specify a wide variety of settings for each camera connected to the NetDVMS system.
Your entry point for such camera configuration is the Administrator window.
To configure a camera, select the required camera in the Administrator window's Device Manager
section, then click the Administrator window's Settings... button.
This will open the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, in which you have
access to settings for the camera in question, including:
•
How the camera should record (frame rate, image quality, etc.)
•
Where and when to store recorded video from the camera
•
Motion detection sensitivity
•
Triggering of notifications and external output
•
... and more
This also applies if you want to edit the settings for an already configured camera.
Camera Settings for [Device Name][Camera Name] Window
The Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window lets you specify settings for a
particular camera.
37
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Access: You access the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window from the
Administrator window, by selecting a camera in the Device Manager section, then clicking the
Settings... button.
The Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window contains the following sections and
buttons:
Speedup Settings
Note: Special settings apply for cameras using MPEG. Read more at the end of the description
of this section.
The Speedup Settings section lets you specify the required number of frames to be used when
motion is detected and/or an event occurs in this field.
•
Required framerate: Specify required number of frames in the first field, and select
required unit (per Second, per Minute, or per Hour) from the list.
The frame rate must be higher than the frame rate specified in the Required framerate field in
the Recording settings section which is described in the following.
Tip: When you specify a frame rate, the interval between images is automatically calculated
and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields.
Specifically for cameras using MPEG
For MPEG cameras you can select predefined frame rates, and it is not possible to select unit.
The number of seconds between each image is still calculated.
Recording Settings
The Recording Settings section lets you specify the camera's recording settings in the following
fields:
•
Required framerate: Specify required number of frames in the first field, and select
required unit (per Second, per Minute, or per Hour) from the list.
Tip: When you specify a frame rate, the interval between images is automatically
38
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
calculated and displayed to the right of the frame rate fields.
Specifically for cameras using MPEG: Instead of selecting the required frame rate, you can
select a Frame Type. Select All to record everything; this is similar to having the same
frame rate for speedup and for recording. Select Key frame if you wish only to record key
frames and ignore changes between the key frames; this means that you typically record
one frame per second.
•
Enable speedup: NetDVMS is able to increase the frame rate of a camera if motion is
detected, or if an event occurs.
Select the check box to enable increased frame rate on motion detection or on an event,
then specify the required conditions in the following fields.
Tip: In the Camera/Alert Scheduler window you can specify periods in which the
camera should always speedup.
o On motion: Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected.
Select this check box to use a higher frame rate when motion is detected.
Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Speedup settings
section.
The camera will return to the original frame rate two seconds after the last motion
is detected.
o On event: Available only if the Enable speedup check box is selected.
Select the check box to use a higher frame rate when an event occurs and until
another event occurs, then select required start and stop events in the Start and
Stop lists.
The camera will increase its frame rate when the start event occurs, and return to
the original frame rate when the stop event occurs.
Remember to specify the required higher frame rate in the Speedup settings
section.
Note: Use of speedup on event requires that events have been defined in the I/O
Setup window, accessed by clicking the I/O Setup... button in the Administrator
window.
•
When to store images in the database: Select when video received from the
camera should be stored in the database:
o
Always: Always store all received video in the database.
o
Never: Never store any received video in the database. Live video will be
displayed, but, since no video is kept in the database, users will not be able to
browse video from the camera.
o
Conditionally: Store received video in the database when certain conditions are
met. When you select this option, specify required conditions in the following
fields.
•
On motion: Available only when the option Conditionally is selected, i.e.
when video received from the camera should be stored in the database on
39
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
certain conditions only. Select the check box to store all video in which
motion is detected.
•
•
On event: Available only when the option Conditionally is selected, i.e.
when video received from the camera should be stored in the database on
certain conditions only. Select the check box to store all video, regardless
of motion, when an external event occurs and until another external
event occurs, then select required start and stop events in the Start and
Stop lists. Use of storage on event requires that events have been
defined. Read more about events in About Input, Events & Output ...
[Number of] seconds pre/post recordings on event: Available only when the
option Conditional is selected, i.e. when video received from the camera should be
stored in the database on certain conditions only.
You are able to store recordings from periods preceding and following detected motion
and/or specified events. Using such a pre/post buffer can be advantageous: If, for
example, you have defined that video should be stored when a door is opened, being
able to see what happened immediately prior to the door being opened may be
important.
Specify the number of seconds for which you want to store video from before and after
the storage conditions are met.
Example: You have specified that video should be stored conditionally on event, with a
start event called Door Opened and a stop event called Door Closed. With a pre/post
buffer of three seconds, video will be stored from three seconds before Door Opened
occurs to three seconds after Door Closed occurs.
Note: Pre/post recording periods cannot be displayed in the timelines of NetGuardEVS's timeline browser. The fact that these periods cannot be displayed in the
timeline browser's timelines does not affect recording.
Live Settings
The Live settings section lets you determine the frame rate with which users will view live
video in their access clients. Select either Same as recording or Same as speedup.
Note: This section is not available for cameras using MPEG. For MPEG, viewing of live video
will take place with the same frame rate as specified for speedup.
Audio
In the Audio section you are able to associate a microphone and/or a speaker with the
selected camera.
Note: The ability to associate a microphone and/or a speaker with the selected camera
requires that at least one microphone and/or speaker has been attached to a device on the
surveillance system.
When a microphone and/or a speaker is associated with a camera, audio from the source will
automatically be used when video from the camera is viewed. Note that you are able to select
a microphone and/or a speaker attached to another device than the selected camera.
To associate a microphone and/or a speaker with the selected camera, simply select the
required microphone and/or speaker from the Default microphone and Default speaker lists.
40
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
For cameras attached to the same device as a microphone and/or a speaker, the microphone
and/or speaker is automatically selected and cannot be changed.
Fisheye
Note: Functionality in the Fisheye section is only available if the use of fisheye lens technology
for 360° viewing has been enabled for the device to which the camera is attached. For
dedicated fisheye cameras, the use of fisheye technology is automatically enabled. If not
dealing with a dedicated fisheye camera, you enable use of fisheye technology for a device in
the Edit device settings window, accessed by selecting the required device in the Administrator
window's Device Manager section, then clicking the Administrator window's Edit Device...
button.
The Fisheye section contains the following fields and buttons:
•
Enable Fisheye: Select check box to enable the use of fisheye, a technology that allows viewing
of 360-degree panoramic images through an advanced lens on the particular camera.
•
Fisheye Settings...:Opens the Fisheye Camera Configuration window, in which you
configure the camera's fisheye functionality.
Motion Detection Settings
The Motion Detection Settings section contains two buttons for configuring the camera's motion detection:
•
Motion Detection...:Opens the Adjust Motion Detection window, in which you are able to specify
motion detection sensitivity levels.
•
Exclude Regions...:Opens the Define Exclusion Regions window in which you are able to disable
motion detection in specific areas of the camera's images.
Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion, for
example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly
pass by in the background.
Database Settings
The database for each camera is capable of containing a maximum of 600,000 records or 40
GB per day.
Note that camera databases also store recorded audio from associated audio sources; see
Important Information about Using Audio for more information.
Tip: By using archiving it is possible to store recordings beyond the capabilities of the
camera's database.
The Database settings section lets you specify where the database containing the camera's
recordings should be kept, how much data to store, etc. You specify this information in the
following fields:
•
Max records in database: Select this option to limit the database size based on a
maximum allowed number of records in the database. Specify required maximum
number of records in the neighboring field.
When the database reaches the maximum number of records, the oldest record in the
41
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
database will automatically be overwritten. A database can contain up to 600,000
records.
•
Max timespan in database: Select this option to limit the database size based on
the age of records in the database. Specify the required number in neighboring field,
and select required unit (Minutes, Hours, or Days) from the list.
When records become older than the specified number of minutes, hours, or days,
they will automatically be deleted.
Note: A database can contain no more than 600,000 records, regardless of what
maximum age has been defined.
Tip: You will receive a message if—based on the recording frame rate you have
specified for the camera—NetDVMS detects that the maximum number of allowed
records in the database is likely to be reached before the end of the specified time
span.
•
Clear Database... :Click button to delete all records stored in the database for the
camera in question.
WARNING: Use with caution; all records in the database for the camera will be
permanently deleted. As a security measure, you will be asked to confirm that you
want to permanently delete all stored records for the camera.
Records stored in archived databases will not be affected.
Note: If the Recording Server service is running, the button will not be available. To
make the button available, pause the Recording Server service by clicking the
Administrator window's Service Manager button, then clicking the Pause button or by
stopping the service from the Recording Server Manager icon.
IMPORTANT: No video or audio will be recorded while the Recording Server service
is paused or stopped.
•
Archive automatically when database is full: Select this check box if you wish to
automatically archive the database when it is full.
Note: For this feature to work, you should first enable archiving in the Archive Setup
Window.
•
Delete archives older than [n] days (0 to use default archive setting):In this
field you can specify after how many days archives for the camera should be deleted.
Note: What you specify here overwrites what you have specified in the Archive Setup
Window. Type 0 to use same number of days as specified the Archive Setup window.
•
Database path: Specify which local directory the database for the camera should be
kept in.
Example: C:\videodata\
To browse for a folder, click the browse button next to the Database path field.
42
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Note: Even though it is possible to specify a path to a network drive, it is highly
recommended that you specify a path to a local drive. If using a path to a network
drive, it will not be possible to save to the database should the network drive become
unavailable.
Tip: If you have several cameras, and several local drives are available,
performance can be improved by distributing the databases of individual cameras
across the local drives.
•
In case of database failure, take the following action: Select which action to take
if the database becomes corrupted.
The number of available actions depends on whether archiving has been enabled. You
enable archiving for a camera in the Archive setup window, accessed from the
Administrator window by clicking the Archive Setup... button.
o
Repair, Scan, Delete if fails: Default action. If the database becomes
corrupted, two different repair methods will be attempted: a fast repair and a
thorough repair. If both repair methods fail, the contents of the database will
be deleted.
o
Repair, Delete if fails: If the database becomes corrupted, a fast repair will be
attempted. If the fast repair fails, the contents of the database will be deleted.
o
Repair, Archive if fails: Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera. If
the database becomes corrupted, a fast repair will be attempted. If the fast
repair fails, the contents of the database will be archived. This action is
recommended if archiving is enabled for the camera.
o
Delete (no repair): If the database becomes corrupted, the contents of the
database will be deleted.
o
Archive (no repair): Available only if archiving is enabled for the camera. If the
database becomes corrupted, the contents of the database will be archived.
Tip: Provided the corrupt database has been archived, it can be repaired by
the Viewer: Open the Viewer and attempt to browse the archived recordings
from the camera in question. Browsing will initially fail, but this will make the
Viewer start repairing the corrupt database.
Tip: See also How to Protect Databases from Corruption.
When the contents of the local database for the camera are either deleted or
archived, the database is reset and will be ready for storing new recordings.
Note: No video can be recorded while the database is being repaired. For large
installations, a repair may take several hours, especially if the Repair, Scan, Delete if
fails action involving two different repair methods is selected, and the first repair
method (fast repair) fails.
43
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Database Resizing
In case recordings for a camera get bigger than expected, or the available drive space is
suddenly reduced in another way, an advanced database resizing procedure will automatically
take place:
If archives are present on the same drive as the camera's database, the oldest archive for all
cameras archived on that drive will be moved to another drive (moving archives is only
possible if you use dynamic archiving, with which you can archive to several different drives;
configured through the Archive Setup Window) or, if moving is not possible, deleted.
If no archives are present on the drive containing the camera's database, the size of all
camera databases on the drive will be reduced by deleting a percentage of their oldest
recordings, thus temporarily limiting the size of all databases
When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing, the original database
sizes will be used. You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved, or adjust
camera database sizes to reflect the altered drive size.
Tip: Should the database resizing procedure take place, you will be informed on-screen in
NetGuard-EVS, in log files, and (if set up) through an e-mail and/or SMS alert.
Tip: For more information about how NetDVMS responds to the threat of running out of disk
space, see About Archiving.
Image Quality...
The Image Quality... button opens the Configure Device window, in which you are able to
configure image resolution, compression, etc. for the camera.
Event Notifications...
The Event Notifications... button opens the Setup Notifications on Events window, in
which you are able to select events for triggering event indications for the camera
when displayed in NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS.
Note: The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been
specified for a device on your NetDVMS system; the event does not have to be
specified for the particular camera. Read more about events in About Input, Events &
Output ....
Outputs...
The Outputs... button opens the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name]
window, in which you are able to specify which outputs (e.g. the sounding of a siren or the
switching on of the lights) should be associated with motion detection and/or with output buttons
for manually triggering output when the camera is selected in NetGuard, Ocularis Client
Lite or NetGuard-EVS.
Note: The use of outputs requires that at least one event has been specified for a
device on your NetDVMS system; the event does not have to be specified for the
particular camera. You specify output events in the I/O Setup window, accessed by
clicking the I/O Setup... button in the Administrator window.
44
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
PTZ Preset Positions... (PTZ Cameras Only)
Available only if the camera is a PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) camera supporting PTZ preset
positions, the PTZ Preset Positions... button opens PTZ Preset Positions for [Device
Name] [Camera Name] window, in which you are able to specify preset positions and
patrolling for the camera.
Note: If the Recording Server service is running, the button will not be available. To
make the button available, pause the Recording Server service by clicking the
Administrator window's Service Manager... button, then clicking the Pause button.
IMPORTANT: No video or audio will be recorded while the Recording Server service is
paused.
Editing Camera Name/Number
The Camera Name and Number window lets you edit the name of a selected camera, and, if required,
assign a shortcut number to the selected camera.
Access: You access the Camera Name and Number window from the Administrator window's device
Manager section: Right-click the name of the required camera, then select Edit from the menu that
appears:
The Camera Name and Number window contains two fields:
Field
Description
Camera
Name
Displays the name of the camera. If required, you are able to overwrite
the existing camera name with a new one.
Camera
Number
Users of NetGuard-EVS can take advantage of a range of keyboard
shortcuts, some of which let the users toggle between viewing different
cameras. Such shortcuts include numbers, which are used to identify
each camera. Each camera's shortcut number is specified in the Cam
Number field.
Shortcut numbers must be unique for each camera.
A camera shortcut number must not contain any letters or special
characters, and must be no longer than eight digits. Examples of correct
camera shortcut numbers: 3, 12345678. Examples of incorrect camera
shortcut numbers: A*3, 123456789.
Note: Camera shortcut numbers are only used in NetGuard-EVS. In
other applications, such as Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard, the camera
shortcuts cannot be used.
Tip: More information about using the keyboard shortcuts is available in
the documentation for NetGuard-EVS.
45
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Event Notifications
Note: The use of event notifications requires that at least one event has been specified for a device on
your NetDVMS system; the event does not have to be specified for the particular camera.
The Setup Notifications on Events window lets you select events for triggering event notifications for
the camera when displayed in NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS.
Access: You access the Setup Notifications on Events window from the Camera settings for [Device
Name] [Camera Name] window, by clicking the Event Notifications button.
What Is an Event Notification?
In NetGuard or NetGuard-EVS, three differently colored indicators are available for each
camera: a yellow indicator, a red indicator, and a green indicator. When event notification is
used for a camera, the yellow indicator will light up when the specified events have occurred.
Event notifications can be valuable for camera operators, as they will be able to quickly detect
that an event has occurred, even though their focus was perhaps on something else the
moment the event occurred.
Yellow indicator in clients is
used for event notifications
Tip: The clients' other two indicators serve the following purposes: The red indicator lights
up when motion has been detected, and the green indicator is used for indicating that video is
received from a camera.
The indicators in Ocularis Client Lite use a different color scheme. Refer to the Ocularis Client
Lite manual for more information.
Specifying Events for which Event Notification Should Be
Used
To specify which events should trigger an event notification for the camera, do the following
for each required event:
1.
In the Available Events list, select the required event.
Tip: You are not limited to events associated with a particular device: You are able
to select between all available events (input events, timer events, event buttons) from
all cameras on the NetDVMS surveillance system.
46
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
2.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Click the >> button to copy the selected event to the Active Events list.
When an event listed in the Active Events list occurs, the yellow indicator in clients will
light up.
3.
Repeat for each required event.
To remove an event from the Active Events list, select the event in question, and click the <<
button.
Fisheye (360° Views)
Note: Use of the fisheye technology requires a dedicated fisheye camera or a special fisheye camera
lens with a special fisheye license key, specified in the Edit Device Settings window.
Fisheye is a technology that allows viewing of 360-degree panoramic images through an advanced
lens. The Fisheye Camera Configuration window lets you configure the fisheye functionality of a
camera.
Access: You access the Fisheye Camera Configuration window from the Camera Settings for
[Device Name] [Camera name] window, by selecting the Enable Fisheye check box, and clicking the
Fisheye Settings... button.
47
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Fisheye View Adjustment
The camera's fisheye functionality is configured by adjusting its fisheye view field, indicated by
a green ellipse in the preview image, so it encloses the actual image area of the fisheye lens.
You do this by specifying a number of values which will be used by the fisheye technology for
converting the elliptic image into an ordinary rectangular image.
You are able to set the ellipse's X-radius, Y-radius, X-center, and Y-center, either by specifying
the required values directly in the four fields, or by using the following buttons to adjust the
ellipse:
Button
Description
R-
Decreases the radius of the fisheye view field.
The ellipse's horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) radiuses are changed at
the same time, keeping the aspect ratio.
R+
Increases the radius of the fisheye view field.
The ellipse's horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) radiuses are changed at
the same time, keeping the aspect ratio.
Rx-
Decreases the horizontal (X) radius of the ellipse.
Rx+
Increases the horizontal (X) radius of the ellipse.
Ry-
Decreases the vertical (Y) radius of the ellipse.
Ry+
Increases the vertical (Y) radius of the ellipse.
X-
Moves the ellipse to the left.
X+
Moves the ellipse to the right.
Y-
Moves the ellipse up.
Y+
Moves the ellipse down.
Previewing the Fisheye View
You are able to toggle between previewing the fisheye view and the fisheye-rendered view,
i.e. the original elliptic view as well as the “flattened” rectangular view resulting from applying
the fisheye algorithm according to your specified values.
To toggle between the two different types of preview, click the Toggle Preview button.
48
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
When previewing the fisheye-rendered view, the following navigation buttons become
available for moving around within the preview image area:
Moves the fisheye-rendered view up and to the left
Moves the fisheye-rendered view up
Moves the fisheye-rendered view up and to the right
Moves the fisheye-rendered view to the left
Moves the fisheye-rendered view to its home position
Moves the fisheye-rendered view to the right
Moves the fisheye-rendered view down and to the left
Moves the fisheye-rendered view down
Moves the fisheye-rendered view down and to the right
Zoom out (one zoom level per click)
Zoom in (one zoom level per click)
Ceiling Mounted Cameras
If the camera is mounted on a ceiling, you can adjust the behavior of the navigation buttons
to reflect this by selecting the Ceiling Mount check box.
Setting a View as Home Position
When previewing the fisheye-rendered view, you are able to set a particular position in the
fisheye-rendered view as the camera's PTZ home position: Navigate to the required position,
using the navigation buttons, then click the Set View as Home Position button.
Image Resolution
Image resolution values are automatically displayed in the lower part of the window, next to
the navigation buttons. When using fisheye, image resolution will automatically be set to the
highest available resolution.
Motion Detection
The Adjust Motion Detection window lets you specify motion detection sensitivity for a specific camera.
Depending on your configuration, motion detection sensitivity settings may determine when
recordings from the camera are transferred to the surveillance system, when alerts are generated,
when external outputs (such as lights or sirens) are triggered, etc.
49
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Motion detection sensitivity is therefore a key element in your NetDVMS surveillance solution, and
time spent on finding the best possible motion detection settings for each camera may help you later
avoid unnecessary alerts, etc.
Depending on the physical location of the camera, it may be a very good idea to test motion detection
settings under different physical conditions (day/night, windy/calm weather, etc.).
The Adjust Motion Detection window
Access: You access the Adjust Motion Detection window by clicking the Motion Detection... button
in the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
Note: Before you configure motion detection sensitivity for a camera, it is highly recommended that
you have configured the camera's image quality settings, such as resolution, compression, etc., in the
Configure Device window, and that you have specified any areas to be excluded from motion detection
(for example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly
pass by in the background) in the Define Exclusion Regions window. If you later change image quality
settings and/or exclusion area settings, you should always test motion detection sensitivity settings
afterwards.
The Adjust Motion Detection window features two sliders; one for setting Noise Sensitivity and one for
setting Motion Sensitivity:
Noise Sensitivity
Noise is insignificant changes in individual pixels which should not be regarded as motion.
The Noise Sensitivity slider determines how much each pixel must change before it is regarded
as motion. Insignificant changes, which should not be regarded as motion, are considered
acceptable noise, hence the name of the slider.
With a high noise sensitivity, very little change in a pixel is required before it is regarded as
motion.
Areas in which motion is detected are highlighted in the preview image. Select a slider position
in which only detections you consider motion are highlighted.
As an alternative to using the slider, you may specify a value between 0 and 256 in the field
next to the slider to control the noise sensitivity setting.
Tip: If you find the concept of noise sensitivity difficult to grasp, try dragging the slider to
the left towards the High position: The more you drag the slider towards the High position, the
50
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
more of the preview image becomes highlighted. This is because with a high noise sensitivity
even the slightest change in a pixel will be regarded as motion.
Motion Sensitivity
The Motion Sensitivity slider determines how many pixels must change in the image before it
is regarded as motion.
The selected motion sensitivity level is indicated by the black vertical line in the motion level
indication bar below the preview image. The black vertical line serves as a threshold: When
detected motion is above the selected sensitivity level, the bar changes color from green to
red, indicating a positive detection.
As an alternative to using the slider, you may specify a value between 0 and 10,000 in the
field next to the slider to control the motion sensitivity setting.
Define Exclusion Regions Window
The Define Exclusion Regions window lets you disable motion detection in specific areas of a camera's
images.
Disabling motion detection in certain areas may help you avoid detection of irrelevant motion, for
example if the camera covers an area where a tree is swaying in the wind or where cars regularly pass
by in the background.
The Define Exclusion Regions window, with
an exclusion area highlighted in blue
Access: You access the Define Exclusion Regions window by clicking the Exclude Regions... button
in the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
Defining Areas in which Motion Detection Should Be
Disabled
The Define Exclusion Regions window features a preview image from the camera. You define
the areas in which motion detection should be disabled in the preview image, which is divided
into small sections by a grid.
To define areas in which motion detection should be disabled, drag the mouse pointer over the
required areas in the preview image while pressing the mouse button down. Left mouse button
selects a grid section; right mouse button clears a grid section. Selected areas are highlighted
in blue.
51
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Define Exclusion Regions Window's Buttons and Check
Boxes
The Define Exclusion Regions window features the following buttons:
Button,
Check Box
Description
Set All
Lets you quickly select all grid sections in the preview image. This
may be advantageous if you want to disable motion detection in
most areas of the image, in which case you can simply clear the few
sections in which you do not want to disable motion detection.
Clear All
Lets you quickly clear all grid sections in the preview image.
Auto
By clicking the Auto button you can make NetDVMS automatically detect
areas with noise (insignificant changes in individual pixels which should not
be regarded as motion) in the image, and automatically mark such areas as
areas in which motion detection should be disabled.
As the automatic detection is based on an analysis of a number of images, it
may take a few seconds from you click the Auto button to noisy areas are
detected and marked as areas in which motion detection should be disabled.
Note: The automatic detection of noisy areas happens according to
the noise sensitivity setting specified in the Adjust Motion Detection
window. In order for the automatic detection of noisy areas to work
as intended, it is recommended that you specify a noise sensitivity
setting that matches your requirements before you make use of the
automatic detection feature.
Show Grid
With the Show grid check box selected (default), the preview image contains
a grid indicating the division of the preview image into selectable sections.
With the Show grid check box cleared, the grid in the preview image
is removed. This may provide a less obscured view of the preview
image. Selection of areas in which motion detection should be
disabled takes place the same way as when the grid is visible.
Output Settings
In the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window you are able to associate a camera
with particular external outputs, defined in the I/O Setup window, for example the sounding of a siren
or the switching on of lights.
The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually
through output buttons available in NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS.
52
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Access: You access the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window from the
Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, by clicking the Outputs... button.
Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected
Motion
Note: Use of features in the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window
requires that output has been defined in the I/O Setup window.
You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs:
•
You are able to select between all available outputs, i.e. outputs defined as output
events for the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other
devices on the NetDVMS system
•
The same output may be used for manual control as well as for automatic triggering
when motion is detected
Selecting Output for Manual Control
You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually from a list in NetGuard, Ocularis
Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS.
To specify an output for manual triggering in an OnSSI client, do the following:
1.
Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings
for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
Tip: When you select an output in the All Outputs list, you can view detailed
information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of
the window.
2.
Click the >> button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control
list. This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list.
An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way.
You are able to determine each output’s position in NetGuard’s and NetGuard-EVS’s output list
by moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down
buttons located to the right of the list. The selected output is moved up one step each time
you click the up button. Likewise, each time you click the down button, the selected output is
moved down one step.
53
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
To remove an output from the On Manual Control list, simply select the required output, and
click the << button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list.
Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection
You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in video
from the camera.
Tip: This feature does not require that a VMD (Video Motion Detection) event has been
defined for the camera in the I/O Setup window.
To select an output for use when motion is detected in video from the camera:
3.
Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings
for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
Tip: When you select an output in the All Outputs list, you can view detailed
information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of
the window.
4.
Click the >> button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected
list.
This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list.
To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list, simply select the required output, and
click the << button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list.
Tip: See also About Input, Events & Output ...
PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom)
Available only when dealing with a PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) camera supporting PTZ preset positions, the
PTZ Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window lets you view and—for many, but not
all, PTZ cameras—define preset positions for the PTZ camera.
The PTZ Preset Positions for [Device
Name] [Camera Name] window
54
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Access: To access the PTZ Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click
the PTZ Preset Positions... button in the Camera Settings for [Device Name [Camera Name]
window.
The button is only available if the camera supports PTZ preset positions. Note that if the Recording
Server service is running, the button will not be available; see the description of the Camera
Settings for [Device Name [Camera Name] window for information about how to make the button
available.
Why Use Preset Positions?
Defined preset positions can be used for making the PTZ camera automatically go to particular
preset positions when particular events occur, and for specifying PTZ patrolling schemes.
Defined preset positions will also become selectable in NetGuard/NetGuard-EVS/Ocularis Client
Lite, allowing users of these applications to move the PTZ camera to the preset positions.
Absolute and Relative Positioning PTZ Cameras
Your configuration options depend on whether the PTZ camera in question is of the absolute
positioning or relative positioning kind:
•
Absolute: For an absolute positioning PTZ camera, you are able to define up to 50
preset positions.
You define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the required position with
the controls in the PTZ View section, then naming the position in the window's Preset
Positions section.
•
Relative: For a relative positioning PTZ camera, the number of preset positions will
depend on the camera/video encoder and PTZ driver used.
For some relative positioning PTZ cameras you will only be able to use preset positions
defined on the camera/video encoder itself (when this is the case, the preset positions
are typically defined through the camera/video server's “built-in” web page).
For relative positioning PTZ cameras allowing definition of preset positions through the
NetDVMS system, you define a preset position by moving the PTZ camera to the
required position with the controls in the PTZ View section, then naming the position in
the window's Preset Positions section.
55
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
How to Define a Preset Position
To define a preset position, do the following:
Note: Some PTZ cameras of the relative positioning kind do not allow you to define preset
positions as described in the following; for such cameras, you should define preset positions
on the camera/video encoder itself.
1.
First use the controls in the PTZ Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name]
window's PTZ View section to move the PTZ camera to the required position.
2.
Having moved the PTZ camera to the required position, select an undefined item (may
be labeled Undefined or with a position number) in the Preset Positions section's list of
preset position names, and click the Set Position button to define a name for the
preset position.
For detailed information about the functionality of PTZ Preset Positions for [Device
Name] [Camera Name] window—such as the ability to test your preset positions, the
ability to combine preset positions with events, or the ability to use preset positions in
PTZ patrolling schemes—see Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name]
window's sections in the following.
You are able to define up to 50 preset positions.
56
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
PTZ Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name]
Window's Sections
Each of the PTZ Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window's sections are
described in the following:
PTZ View Section
The PTZ View section lets you control the PTZ camera, and watch the PTZ camera's movements.
You use this section to move the PTZ camera to the positions you then define as presets
positions in the Preset Positions section.
To move the PTZ camera, simply click the required position in the preview picture.
The PTZ View section also features sliders allowing you to move the PTZ camera along each of its
axes: the X-axis (allowing you to pan left/right), the Y-axis (allowing you to tilt the camera
up/down), and the Z-axis (enabling you to zoom in and out; the camera will zoom in when you
move the slider towards Tele, and zoom out when you move the slider towards Wide).
As an alternative to clicking the required position in the preview or using the sliders, you can use
the PTZ camera navigation buttons:
Moves the PTZ camera up and to the left
Moves the PTZ camera up
Moves the PTZ camera up and to the right
Moves the PTZ camera to the left
Moves the PTZ camera to its home position
Moves the PTZ camera to the right
Moves the PTZ camera down and to the left
Moves the PTZ camera down
Moves the PTZ camera down and to the right
Zoom out (one zoom level per click)
Zoom in (one zoom level per click)
57
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Preset Positions Section
Having specified a camera position in the PTZ View section, you define the required position as a
preset in the Preset Positions section:
Button,
Check Box
Description
Use preset
positions
from device
Available only for cameras supporting this feature.
Check box to use preset positions defined on the camera or
video encoder device.
Using preset positions from the camera or video encoder device
will clear any preset positions you have defined for the PTZ
camera; you will therefore be asked to confirm your selection.
Note: In order for preset positions from the camera or video
encoder device to work with NetDVMS , the names of the
preset positions must contain only the characters A-Z, a-z and
0-9, and must not contain spaces. If preset position names on
the camera or video encoder device contain other characters,
or spaces, change the preset position names on the device
before selecting the Use preset positions from device feature.
Set Position
Associates the preset position selected in the list with the
position specified in the PTZ View section.
If the preset position selected in the list is yet undefined, you
will be asked to specify a name for the preset position.
Edit Name...
Lets you edit a preset position name selected in the list.
Only works for an already defined preset position name.
Test
Lets you test a defined preset position.
Select the required preset position in the list, then click the
Test button. The effect is displayed instantly in the PTZ View
section.
Delete
Lets you delete a preset position selected in the list.
When a preset position name is deleted, it will appear as
undefined in the list.
[Move up]
Lets you move a preset position selected in the list up and
down respectively.
[Move down]
58
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Button,
Check Box
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
The selected preset position is moved one step per click.
By moving preset position up or down, you are able to control
the sequence in which available preset positions are presented
in OnSSI clients:
In NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS, users may
select preset positions from a list. By moving a preset position
up or down in the Preset Positions section's list, you can thus
determine the sequence in which preset positions are presented
in an OnSSI client's list.
Preset Position on Events Section
If you have specified events, event or generic events, you are able to make the PTZ camera
automatically go to particular preset positions when particular events occur.
To configure the use of preset positions on events, click the Setup... button. This will open the Event
window (for preset positions on event), in which you are able to associate particular preset positions
with particular events.
To use preset positions on event, select the Goto preset on event check box.
Patrolling Section
To configure PTZ patrolling (the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between several preset
positions), click the Setup... button to go to the Setup PTZ Patrolling window.
PTZ patrolling requires that at least two preset positions have been defined.
59
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Event Window (for PTZ Preset Positions on Event)
Available only when dealing with a PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) camera, the Event window (for preset
positions on events) lets you associate particular preset positions with particular events, timer events
or event buttons. You are thus able to make the PTZ camera automatically go to a particular preset
position when a particular event occurs.
The Event window (for preset positions on events)
Access: To access the Event window (for preset positions on events), click the Setup... button in
Preset Position on Events section of the PTZ Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name]
window.
Note: To use preset positions on events, you must have specified events, event or generic events.
Only one PTZ preset position can be defined per event per camera.
Associating Preset Positions with Particular Events
When associating a preset position from a particular PTZ camera with one or more events, you
are able to select between all events defined on the NetDVMS system; you are not limited to
selecting events defined on a particular device.
To associate a particular preset position with a particular event, do the following:
1.
Select the required preset position in the Available Preset Positions list in the left side of the
Event window.
2.
Select the required event in the list of available events (the list in the middle of the window).
3.
Click the >> button located to the right of the Available Events list.
This will copy the selected event to the window's rightmost list, in which events associated
with the selected preset position are listed. When the selected event occurs, or when the
selected event button is clicked, the PTZ camera will automatically move to the required
preset position.
You are able to associate a preset position with more than one event: Simply repeat the process
for each required association.
To end the association between a particular preset position and a particular event, simply select
the required event in the window's rightmost list, and click the << button.
60
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
PTZ Patrolling Window
Available only when dealing with a PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) camera, the Setup PTZ Patrolling window lets
you configure patrol schemes for PTZ patrolling (the automatic movement of a PTZ camera between
several preset positions) for the camera.
The Setup PTZ Patrolling window
Access: To access the Setup PTZ Patrolling window, click the Setup... button in Patrolling section of
the PTZ Preset Positions for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
Note: To use patrolling, you must have specified at least two preset positions for the PTZ camera in
question.
Tip: Although it is technically not patrolling, specifying a patrol scheme with only one preset
position is possible. A patrol scheme with only one preset position can, when combined with
scheduling, be useful in two cases: For moving a PTZ camera to a specific position at a specific time,
and for moving a PTZ camera to a specific position upon manual PTZ control of the camera.
Note: When you have defined your patrol schemes, also remember to schedule use of the patrol
schemes in the Camera/Alert Scheduler window.
Note: Bear in mind that patrolling can be overridden if operators (with the necessary user rights)
manually control PTZ cameras.
Patrol Scheme
A PTZ camera may patrol according to several different patrol schemes. For example, a PTZ
camera in a supermarket may patrol according to one patrol scheme during opening hours, and
according to another patrol scheme when the supermarket is closed.
The Patrol scheme list lets you select which patrol scheme to configure.
Defining a New Patrol Scheme
To define a new patrol scheme, click the New button. This will add a New patrol scheme listing to
the Patrol scheme list.
To change the name from New patrol scheme to a name of your choice, select the New patrol
scheme listing, and click the Rename button.
Copying an Existing Patrol Scheme
If you want to create a new patrol scheme based on an existing one, you can copy the existing
patrol scheme.
61
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
To copy an existing patrol scheme, select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list,
and click the Copy button. This will add a copy of the selected patrol scheme to the list.
The copy will initially be named Copy of [Patrol Scheme Name]. To change the name to a name of
your choice, select the Copy of [Patrol Scheme Name] listing, and click the Rename button.
Renaming an Existing Patrol Scheme
To change the name of an existing patrol scheme, select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol
scheme list, and click the Rename button.
Removing an Existing Patrol Scheme
To remove an existing patrol scheme, select the required patrol scheme in the Patrol scheme list,
and click the Remove button.
Note: The selected patrol scheme will be removed from the list without further warning.
Selecting Preset Positions to Be Used for a PTZ Patrol
Scheme
Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list, you are able to specify which of the
PTZ camera's preset positions should be used for the selected patrolling scheme:
1. In the Preset Positions list, select the names of the preset positions you want to use.
A preset position can be used more than once in a patrol scheme, for example if the preset
position covers an especially important location.
Tip: By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting from the
Preset Positions list, you are able to select several or all of list's preset positions in one go.
2. Click the >> button to copy the selected preset positions to the Patrolling list.
3. The camera will move between preset positions in the sequence they appear in the Patrolling
list, starting at the preset position listed first.
If you want to change the sequence of preset positions in the Preset Positions list, select a
preset position name, and use the move up or move down buttons to move the selected preset
position name.
To remove a preset position from the Patrolling list, select the preset position in question, and
click the << button.
Specifying Timing Settings for a PTZ Patrol Scheme
Having selected a patrolling scheme in the Patrol scheme list, you are able to specify timing
settings for the patrol scheme:
1. In the Stay at each position in the patrol schedule field, specify the number of seconds for
which the PTZ camera should stay at each preset position.
2. In the Time for each PTZ camera movement to complete field, specify the number of seconds
required for the PTZ camera to move between preset positions.
62
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
In order not to generate false motion alarms, motion detection for the PTZ camera is
automatically disabled while the camera moves between two preset positions. After the
specified number of seconds, motion detection is automatically enabled again.
It is thus important that the camera is able to reach all of the patrolling scheme's preset
positions within the number of seconds you specify. If not, false motion is likely to be
detected.
Bear in mind that it takes longer for the PTZ camera to move between positions that are
located physically far apart (e.g. from an extreme left position to an extreme right position)
than between positions that are located physically close together.
3. The total number of seconds between each preset position will be listed below the two fields.
PTZ Patrolling Actions on Detected Motion
You are able to combine a PTZ patrol scheme with motion detection, so that when motion is
detected, the PTZ camera will pause its patrolling and remain at the position where motion was
detected for a specified period of time.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Select the Disable patrolling schedule if motion is detected check box.
2. Select whether the PTZ camera should resume patrolling:
•
When a certain number of seconds has passed since first detection of motion, regardless
whether further motion is detected
- or -
•
When a certain number of seconds has passed without further detection of motion
3. Specify the required number of seconds for selected option.
Example: You may specify that the PTZ camera should go to the next preset position and resume
patrolling when 10 seconds has passed without detection of motion.
PTZ Scanning
PTZ scanning is supported on a few devices only. If your device supports PTZ scanning, the Setup
of PTZ Scanning section lets you enable PTZ scanning and select a PTZ scanning speed.
Quality, Resolution, etc.
Note: Settings in the Configure Device window are to a large extent camera-specific. The window's
contents will therefore vary from camera to camera; descriptions in the following are thus for guidance
only.
The Configure Device window lets you specify image quality settings, such as compression, resolution,
etc. for a specific camera.
63
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Example of the Configure Device
window, with a preview image
Access: You access the Configure Device window by clicking the Image Quality... button in the
Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
The Configure Device window is divided into a Camera Settings section and a preview image section:
Camera Settings Section
The Camera Settings section will typically contain controls for compression, bandwidth, resolution,
color, contrast, brightness, image rotation, and similar.
Include Date and Time in Image
The Camera Settings section may feature an Include Date and Time in Image check box. When
selected, date and time from the camera will be included in images from the camera.
Note: As cameras are separate units which may have separate timing devices, power supplies,
etc., camera time and NetDVMS system time may not correspond fully, and this may occasionally
lead to confusion.
As all images are time-stamped by NetDVMS upon reception, and exact date and time information
for each image is thus already known, it is recommended that you keep the Include Date and
Time in Image check box cleared.
Should you want to use the Include Date and Time in Image feature, it is recommended that you
click the Synchronize Time button, if available. Clicking the Synchronize Time button will set
camera time to system time, but does not guarantee that camera time will match system time
indefinitely.
Tip: For consistent synchronization, you may, if supported by the camera, auto-synchronize
camera and system time via a time server.
Preview Image
When adjusting camera settings, you are able to view the effect of your settings by clicking the
Preview Image button, located at the bottom of the window.
64
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Clicking the Preview Image button will provide you with an image from the camera in question, as
it would look with the settings specified in the Camera Settings section.
When you have found the best possible camera settings, click OK to apply the settings for the
camera.
Archiving
With the daily archiving feature in NetDVMS, you are able to keep recordings for as long as required,
limited only by the available hardware storage capacity.
You enable and configure archiving in the Archive setup window. The Archive setup window also lets
you specify where archives should be stored for each camera.
Benefits of Archiving
By default, information received from cameras is stored by NetDVMS in a database for each camera.
The database for each camera (see Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window) is
capable of containing a maximum of 600,000 records or 40 GB before the oldest records in the
database are overwritten.
With archiving, the amount of records you are able to store is limited only by the available hardware
storage capacity. Note, however, that it is only possible to archive up to 40 GB per camera per day.
By using archiving, you will also be able to back up archived records on backup media of your choice,
using your preferred backup software.
How Archiving Works
For each camera, for which archiving has been specified, the contents of the camera database will be
moved to a default archiving directory called Archives. This will happen automatically one or more
times every day, depending on your archiving settings.
The default archiving directory is located on the computer running the NetDVMS software, by default
in the directory containing the NetDVMS software.
In the archiving directory, separate sub-directories for storing archives for each camera are
automatically created. These sub-directories are named after the MAC address of the device to which
the camera is connected.
Since you are able to keep archives spanning many days of recordings, and since archiving may take
place several times a day, further sub-directories, named after the archiving date and time, are also
automatically created.
The sub-directories will be named according to the following structure:
...\Archives\CameraMACAddress_VideoEncoderChannel\DateAndTime
Example: With the default archiving folder located under C:\videodata, video from an archiving taking
place at 23.15 on 1st June 2008 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video encoder device with
the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination:
C:\videodata\Archives\00408c51e181_2\2008-06-01-23-15
65
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video encoder device with several channels, the
video encoder channel indication in the sub-directory named after the device's MAC address will
always be _1. Example: (e.g. 00408c51e181_1)
Storing Archives at Other Locations than the Default
Archiving Directory
You are of course also able to store archives at other locations than locally in the default archiving
directory. You may, for example, specify that your archives should be stored on a network drive.
When archiving to other locations than the default archiving directory, NetDVMS will first store the
archive in the local default archiving directory, then immediately move the archive to the archiving
location you have specified.
While this may at first glance seem unnecessary, it greatly speeds up the archiving procedure, which
will reduce delays in case of network problems. Archiving directly to a network drive would mean that
archiving time would vary depending on the available bandwidth on the network. First storing the
archive locally, then moving it, ensures that the archiving is always performed as fast as possible.
If archiving to a network drive, note the regular camera database must still be stored on a local drive,
i.e. a drive attached directly to the computer running the NetDVMS system.
Archiving Audio
If audio is enabled on a device, audio from the device will also be archived. If the device is a video
encoder with several channels, audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1.
When an audio source is enabled, audio is recorded to the associated camera’s database. This will
affect the database’s capacity for storing video. It is thus important to bear in mind that the maximum
limit of the database is likely to be reached earlier if recording audio and video than if only recording
video. It is thus a very good idea to use archiving if using audio sources. You may also want to archive
more frequently if recording audio and video than if only recording video.
Storage Capacity Required for Archiving
The storage capacity required for archiving depends entirely on the amount of recordings you plan to
archive.
Some organizations want to keep archived recordings from a large number of cameras for several
months or years. Other organizations may only want to archive recordings from one or two cameras,
and they may want to keep their archives for much shorter periods of time.
Before enabling archiving, you should always consider the storage capacity of the local drive
containing the default archiving directory to which archives are always moved, even though they may
immediately after be moved to an archiving location on a network drive: As a rule of thumb, the
capacity of the local drive should be at least twice the size required for storing the databases of all
cameras for which archiving has been specified.
When archiving data from a camera to external locations, including archiving locations on network
drives, NetDVMS automatically checks that the space required for data to be archived plus 1 GB of
free disk space per camera is available at the external location. If not, the external archive location's
oldest data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new
data to be archived.
66
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
In short: When estimating storage capacity required for archiving, consider your organization's needs,
then plan for worst case rather than best case scenarios.
Automatic Response if Running Out of Disk Space
With archiving, NetDVMS can automatically respond to the threat of running out of disk space. Two
scenarios can occur, depending on whether the camera database drive is different from, or identical
to, the archiving drive:
Different Drives: Automatic Archiving if Database Drive
Runs Out of Disk Space
In case the NetDVMS server is running out of disk space, and
o the archiving drive is different from the camera database drive, and
o archiving has not taken place within the last hour, archiving will automatically begin in an
attempt to free up disk space. This will happen regardless of any archiving schedules, but will
of course only apply for cameras for which archiving has been enabled in the Archive Setup
window.
The server is considered to be running out of disk space if:
o there is less than 10% disk space left, and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus 1.5
GB per camera
- or -
o the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera (example: with ten
cameras, the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space
went below 350 MB (150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras))
The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of
disk space just because they have less than 10% disk space left.
On the archiving drive, NetDVMS automatically checks that the space required for data from a camera
to be archived plus 1 GB of free disk space per camera is available. If not, the archive drive's oldest
data from the camera in question will be deleted until there is sufficient free space for the new data to
be archived.
IMPORTANT: You will lose the archive data being deleted.
Same Drive: Automatic Moving or Deletion of Archives if
Running Out of Disk Space
In case the NetDVMS server is running out of disk space, and the archiving drive is identical to the
camera database drive, NetDVMS will automatically do the following in an attempt to free up disk
space:
1.
First, NetDVMS will attempt to move archives (moving archives is only possible if you use
dynamic archiving, with which you can archive to several different drives; configured through the
Archive Setup Window). This will happen if:
o there is less than 15% disk space left, and the available disk space goes below 40 GB plus 2
GB per camera
- or -
67
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
o the available disk space goes below 225 MB plus 30 MB per camera (example: with ten
cameras, the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space
went below 525 MB (225 MB plus 30 MB for each of the ten cameras))
The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be
running out of disk space just because they have less than 15% disk space left.
2.
If moving archives is not possible, NetDVMS will attempt to delete the oldest archives. This will
happen if:
o there is less than 10% disk space left, and the available disk space goes below 30 GB plus 1.5
GB per camera
- or -
o the available disk space goes below 150 MB plus 20 MB per camera (example: with ten
cameras, the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space
went below 350 MB (150 MB plus 20 MB for each of the ten cameras))
The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be
running out of disk space just because they have less than 10% disk space left.
IMPORTANT: You will lose data from the archives being deleted.
3.
Ultimately, if there are no archives to delete, NetDVMS will attempt to resize camera databases by
deleting their oldest recordings. This will happen if:
o there is less than 5% disk space left, and the available disk space goes below 20 GB plus 1 GB
per camera
- or -
o the available disk space goes below 75 MB plus 10 MB per camera (example: with ten
cameras, the server would be running out of disk space if the remaining available disk space
went below 175 MB (75 MB plus 10 MB for each of the ten cameras))
The difference ensures that very large disks will not necessarily be considered to be running out of
disk space just because they have less than 5% disk space left.
IMPORTANT: You will lose the data deleted as part of the database resizing process.
When the recording server is restarted upon such database resizing, the original database sizes will be
used. You should therefore make sure the drive size problem is solved, or adjust camera database
sizes to reflect the altered drive size.
Tip: Should the database resizing procedure take place, you will be informed on-screen in the
NetGuard-EVS, in log files, and (if set up) through an e-mail and/or SMS alert.
Backing Up Archives
Many organizations want to back up recordings from cameras, using tape drives or similar.
Creating such backups based on the content of camera databases is not recommended; it may cause
sharing violations or other malfunctions.
Instead, create such backups based on the content of archives. If you have not specified separate
archiving locations for separate cameras, you could simply back up the default local archiving
directory, Archives.
When scheduling a backup, make sure the backup job does not overlap with your specified archiving
times.
68
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Viewing Archived Recordings
You view archived recordings in the Viewer or NetGuard-EVS. This way, you are able to use all of
Viewer's or NetGuard-EVS's advanced features (video browsing, smart search, evidence export, etc.)
for archived recordings as well.
Archives Stored Locally or on Network Drives
For archived recordings stored locally or on network drives you simply use the Viewer's or
NetGuard-EVS's browsing features, for example the timeline browser or the playback controls, for
finding and viewing the required recordings; just like you would with recordings stored in a
camera's regular database.
Exported Archives
For exported archives, e.g. archives stored on a CD, you must use the Viewer: Click the browse
button in the Viewer's Database Information control panel to browse for the archive you want to
view. Once you have specified the required archive this way, you can use all of the Viewer's
browsing features for navigating the recordings in the archive.
Virus Scanning and Archiving
If allowed in your organization, disable any virus scanning of camera databases and archiving
locations. For more information see Virus Scanning Information.
New Database if Archiving Fails
Under extremely rare circumstances archiving may fail. For example, a database may be full and
ready for archiving, but the operating system may lock content in the database if a content file is
open. This would prevent archiving. In practice, this situation would only occur if somebody attempted
to view a database file (e.g. a .pic file) directly from the database folder at the time of the archiving
(viewing the file directly would not work since database content cannot be viewed as individual files,
only through a NetGuard-EVS or Viewer).
In such situations, the database will be put aside for archiving at a later point in time. While the
database is put aside, a special temporary database is created for storage of new recordings. This
way, no new recordings will be lost even though the original database is full (provided enough disk
space is available for storing the special temporary database).
NetDVMS will wait for the next archiving occasion (either scheduled or because the special temporary
database also becomes full). It will then archive the content of the special temporary database, and
thus free up space in it. NetDVMS will then continue to store new recordings in the special temporary
database. This will apply until the Recording Server service is restarted. Once the service has been
restarted, the content of the original database will be archived, and new recordings will again be
stored in the original database. The special temporary database will also be archived, and will then
cease to exist.
Can I view recordings from the special temporary database? Normally, the content of
databases can be viewed through a NetGuard-EVS or Viewer, regardless whether the databases have
been archived or not. However, the content of the special temporary database cannot be viewed
through a NetGuard-EVS until the content has been archived. On the surveillance server itself, you will
be able to view the content of the special temporary database through the Viewer, even if the special
temporary database has not been archived yet.
Since the special temporary database will be used for storing new recordings until the Recording
Server service is restarted—even though the original database may no longer be locked—you may in
69
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
these extremely rare situations experience that new recordings are not viewable through NetGuardEVS or Ocularis Client Lite. In that case, restarting the Recording Server service will help, since it will
force the original database to again be used for storing new recordings.
Archive Setup Window
The Archive setup window lets you enable and configure the archiving feature. It also lets you specify
where archives should be stored.
Access: To access the Archive setup window, click the Archive Setup... button in the Administrator
window.
Fields and Buttons
The Archive setup window contains the following fields and buttons:
Field, Button
Description
Enable
Archiving
Select check box to enable the archiving feature.
Note: Remember to specify for which cameras the archiving
feature should be used; you do this in the Select cameras for which
the archiving function should apply section at the bottom of the
window.
Delete
databases in
the backup
directory
older than
Lets you specify how many days you want to keep archived
recordings for. Archived recordings older than the specified number
of days will automatically be deleted.
Automatically
delete old
archives if
space is
needed
Note: You can only change this option if the Automatic path
selection check box (see below) is also selected. If the Automatic
path selection check box is not selected, automatic deletion of old
archives will always be active.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name]window
you can overwrite this setting for a specific camera.
If you select this check box, the oldest archives will automatically
be deleted until there is enough space when new recordings are
moved to the archives.
If you clear this check box, and the archives are full, your
recordings will remain in the local database. When the local
database runs out of space, the oldest recordings will be deleted.
Send email
on archive
error
Select check box if NetDVMS should send an e-mail alert if
archiving fails, for example because the disk is full.
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
70
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Field, Button
Description
Send SMS on
archive error
Select check box if NetDVMS should send an SMS (mobile phone
text message) alert if archiving fails, for example because the disk
is full.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
Automatic
path
selection
Lets you select locations for archiving for all cameras in one go.
This will divide the bottom of the window into two sections: Select
cameras for which the archiving function should apply and Select
drives for dynamic archives. See descriptions below.
Daily
archiving
times
Lists specified archiving times. Archiving will take place every day
at the specified times.
Archiving once a day will normally suffice. However, if you expect
the daily database per camera to exceed 40 GB or 600,000
records, you should specify additional archiving times.
To add an archiving time to the list, specify the required time in the
Time to add field, then click the Add button.
There must be at least one hour between each archiving time.
To remove an archiving time from the list, select the archiving time
to remove from the list, and click the Delete button.
Note: While archiving takes place, cameras for which archiving
applies will briefly stop recording, one after the other. Although the
pause is very brief (typically less than a second), it is therefore
recommended that you specify archiving times that are outside
periods in which you expect to record important video.
Time to add
Lets you add an archiving time to the Daily archiving times list.
You specify the required time by selecting the hour, minute and
second values respectively, then clicking the field's up and down
buttons to increase or decrease values.
Tip: You may also simply overwrite selected hour, minute or
second values.
Add
Adds the archiving time specified in the Time to add field to the
Daily archiving times list.
Delete
Removes a selected archiving time from the Daily archiving times
list.
71
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Field, Button
Description
Select
cameras for
which the
archiving
function
should apply
If the Archive Setup window's Enable Archiving check box is
selected, this section lists cameras for which archiving is possible.
The section lists all enabled cameras, i.e. cameras which,
depending on their individual settings, may transfer video to the
surveillance system. The section also lists the path to the archiving
directory for each camera.
Tip: If a particular camera is not listed, it is highly likely that the
camera is disabled. To check if a camera is disabled, look for the
camera in the Administrator window's Device Manager section. A
disabled camera will be clearly indicated by an icon , and can be
enabled if you right-click the camera name.
SPECIFYING THAT ARCHIVING SHOULD APPLY FOR SPECIFIC
CAMERAS
To specify that archiving should apply for a specific camera, select
the check box next to the name of the required camera.
Specifying that archiving should
apply for a specific camera
Remember that only when you click OK is archiving actually
enabled for the selected cameras.
ARCHIVING LOCATIONS FOR INDIVIDUAL CAMERAS (STATIC
ARCHIVING)
If the Automatic path selection check box is not selected, you must
specify an archiving location for each camera. This is further
described under Static Archiving.
Archiving Locations for All Cameras (Dynamic Archiving)
By selecting the Automatic path selection check box, you can
specify archiving locations for all selected cameras in one go to a
number of drives on your network. Archiving will take place
dynamically to all selected drives. This is further described under
Dynamic Archiving.
Set all
Selects the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras
for which the archiving function should apply section.
Clicking the Set all button is thus a quick way to specify that
archiving should apply for all cameras listed. Remember that only
when you click OK is archiving actually enabled for the selected
cameras.
Clear all
Clears the check boxes for all cameras listed in the Select cameras
for which the archiving function should apply section.
72
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field, Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
Clicking the Clear all button is thus a quick way to specify that
archiving should not apply for any of the cameras listed.
Remember that only when you click OK, archiving is actually
disabled for the selected cameras.
Set all paths
Note: This button is only available if the Automatic path selection
check box is not selected.
Copies the selected path listing to all cameras listed in the Select
cameras for which the archiving function should apply section.
If you use the same archiving directory for all cameras, this can
save you having to manually specify identical paths for each
camera.
Example: You have specified the path
C:\MyFiles\MySurveillanceSystem for a camera. To quickly use this
path for all cameras, select the path listing and click the Set all
paths button.
Add target
Note: The button is only available if the Automatic path selection
check box is selected.
By clicking this button, you can add a new archiving target. When
you click the button, a path named New drive will appear in the
list. To specify a path simply click New drive to overwrite it. The
path you type must exist in the My Network Places folder. Note,
that the path you type will not get a drive letter. That is because it
is not a mapped drive. If it had been a mapped drive, it would
already have been in the list.
Note: You cannot delete a target you have added. Instead, if you
clear a check box for a target you have added manually and click
OK, the target will not be on the list the next time you access the
Archive setup window. However, the Archives folder at the target
destination will remain available for viewing recordings.
Static Archiving
Note: Specifying archiving locations for individual cameras is only possible if you have not selected
the Automatic path selection check box.
If the Automatic path selection check box is not selected, a default archiving location is specified for
each camera. The default archiving directory, called Archives, will be located at this location.
To specify another location for the archiving directory for a camera, either click the browse icon
next to the path listing for the required camera and browse to the required location, or click the
default path listing to overwrite it.
73
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Tip: To maximize load sharing and optimize performance, distribute archives across your available
storage space, if possible.
Note: If specifying another archiving location than the default location , the location you specify must
exist. You are not able to create new directories as part of the process. If archiving to a network drive,
the regular camera database must still be stored on a local drive, i.e. a drive attached directly to the
computer running the NetDVMS system.
Archives for the selected camera will be stored in separate subdirectories under the Archives directory
at the location you specify. The subdirectories will be named according to the following structure:
...\Archives\CameraMACAddress_VideoEncoderChannel\DateAndTime
Example: With the default archiving folder located under C:\videodata, recordings from an archiving
taking place at 23.15 on 1st June 2008 for a camera attached to channel 2 on a video encoder device
with the MAC address 00408c51e181 would be stored at the following destination:
C:\videodata\Archives\00408c51e181_2\2008-06-01-23-15
If the device to which the camera is attached is not a video encoder device with several channels, the
video encoder channel indication in the subdirectory named after the device's MAC address will always
be _1. Example: 00408c51e181_1.
Dynamic Archiving
Dynamic archiving is ideal if you wish to archive to several drives during the same archiving process
but do not want to worry about how much space is used on each drive. Dynamic archiving is only
possible when you select the Automatic path selection check box.
When you select Automatic path selection, you will be able to specify archiving locations for all
selected cameras in one go. In the Select drives for dynamic archives section, simply select the box
next to each drive required as archives.
Note that it is only possible to select drives; you cannot edit the paths. An Archives directory will
automatically be created in each drive, and the archiving will take place the same way as described
previously under Specifying that Archiving Should Apply for Specific Cameras.
If you need to use a path for archiving that is not in the list, click the Add target button which is
described previously.
What Happens During Dynamic Archiving?
If the drive on which the camera stores its regular database is among the drives you have selected for
dynamic archiving, archiving for the camera in question will always take place to that drive first.
If the drive on which the camera stores its regular database is or becomes full—or if it is simply not
among the drives selected for dynamic archiving—archiving will take place to the selected drive with
the most free disk space. Which drive that is may change during the archiving process, and archiving
74
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
may therefore happen to several drives during the same process. However, that has no impact on how
you find and view archived recordings.
Note: If you use a drive for both recording and archiving, archiving to that drive will only take place
from cameras recording to that drive. In that case, you should select one or more other drives for
archiving, so that archiving from other databases will also take place. Alternatively, you should avoid
using the same drive for both recording and archiving.
Important: If you have more that one surveillance server, each surveillance server must archive to
its own mapped location in order for archiving to work. If you try to archive to the same mapped
location from all the servers, archiving will not work.
Archiving Audio
If audio is enabled on a device, audio from the device will also be archived. If the device is a video
encoder with several channels, audio will be archived with the camera on channel 1.
Audio
If you use audio sources (i.e. microphones and/or speakers) on your NetDVMS system, note the
following:
•
Only audio from microphones is recorded: Only incoming audio, i.e. audio recorded by
microphones attached to cameras, is recorded. Outgoing audio, i.e. what NetGuard-EVS
operators say when they talk through speakers attached to cameras, is not recorded.
•
Audio from microphones is recorded even when video is not: When a microphone is
enabled (see Microphone Settings Window), audio from the microphone will be recorded
whenever the associated camera is online (i.e. transmitting data to NetDVMS; see
Camera/Alert Scheduler Window), regardless whether video from the camera is being recorded
or not.
Depending on your cameras’ recording settings, this may mean that when you play back
recordings, you may find that there are periods for which you only have audio recordings.
This will also be the case for exported recordings if audio has been included in the export.
•
Audio recording affects video storage capacity: When a microphone is enabled, audio is
recorded to the associated camera’s database. This will affect the database’s capacity for
storing video. A camera’s database can contain a maximum of 40 GB or 600,000 records. It is
thus important to bear in mind that the maximum limit of the database is likely to be reached
earlier if recording audio and video than if only recording video.
o
Example: If using MPEG4, each one-second video GOP (Group Of Pictures) will be
stored in one record in the database. Each second of audio will also be stored in one
record in the database. When this is the case, the database’s video storage capacity
will be reduced to a maximum of 300,000 records, because half of the database’s total
maximum of 600,000 records will be used for storing audio.
o
Example: If using MJPEG, audio is stored in one record for every JPEG for as long as
the audio block size does not exceed the time between the JPEGs. The database’s
video storage capacity can thus in extreme cases be reduced to a maximum of
300,000 records, because half of the database’s total maximum of 600,000 records
will be used for storing audio. If using very high frame rates, where there is less time
between each JPEG, a smaller portion of the database will be used for storing audio
75
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
records, and consequently a larger portion will be available for storing video.
Thus, a camera database’s maximum video storage capacity may in some cases be halved
when an associated audio source is enabled.
Note: Above examples are simplified. Since databases also have a maximum limit of 40 GB
of data, the exact available video storage capacity will also depend on GOP/JPEG and audio
kilobyte size.
Tip: The Archiving feature enables you to store recordings beyond the capabilities of cameras’
databases. Even if already using archiving, you may want to archive more frequently if
recording audio and video than if only recording video.
Microphone Settings Window
The Microphone Settings window lets you change basic settings for a microphone.
Access: You access the Microphone Settings window from the Administrator window: Select a
microphone in the Administrator window's Device Manager section, then click the Settings button.
•
Device name: Displays the name of the microphone. If required, you are able to overwrite
the existing microphone name with a new one.
•
Enabled: Lets you enable/disable use of the microphone.
Tip: You can also enable/disable a microphone in the Administrator window: Right-click the required
microphone in the Administrator window's Device Manager section, then select Disable or Enable from
the menu that appears.
Note: On some devices, a microphone can also be enabled/disabled on the device itself, typically
through the device's own configuration web page. If a microphone on a device does not work after
enabling it in the Administrator application, you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to
the microphone being disabled on the device itself.
Speaker Settings Window
The Speaker Settings window lets you change basic settings for a speaker.
Access: You access the Speaker Settings window from the Administrator window: Select a speaker
in the Administrator window's Device Manager section, then click the Settings button.
•
Device name: Displays the name of the speaker. If required, you are able to overwrite the
existing speaker name with a new one.
•
Enabled: Lets you enable/disable use of the speaker.
Tip: You can also enable/disable a speaker in the Administrator window: Right-click the required
speaker in the Administrator window's Device Manager section, then select Disable or Enable from the
menu that appears.
Note: On some devices, a speaker can also be enabled/disabled on the device itself, typically through
the device's own configuration web page. If a speaker on a device does not work after enabling it in
the Administrator application, you should thus verify whether the problem may be due to the speaker
being disabled on the device itself.
76
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Download Manager (Access Client Availability)
The Download Manager lets you manage which NetDVMS-related features your organization's users
will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server.
Access: You access the Download Manager from Windows' Start menu: Select All Programs > NVR
Download Manager > NVR Download Manager.
Examples of User-Accessible Features
•
With a standard browser, users connect to the surveillance server where they are
presented with a welcome page. From the welcome page, users can download OnSSI
client software and install it on their computers.
•
Language packs, which let users add additional language versions to their existing
clients. Users download such language packs from the welcome page.
•
Users can connect to welcome page and log in to NetGuard, which simply runs in a
browser without any need for software installation.
•
Various plugins. Downloading such plugins can be relevant for users if your
organization uses add-on products with NetDVMS.
What Does the Welcome Page Look Like?
The welcome page is a simple web page with links to downloading or running various features.
To view the welcome page, simply open an Internet Explorer browser (version 6.0 or later)
and connect to the following address:
http://[surveillance server IP address or hostname]
If the Image Server has been configured with a port number other than the default port 80,
you must specify the port number as well, separated from the IP address or hostname by a
colon:
http://[surveillance server IP address or hostname]:[port number]
The content of the welcome page is managed through the Download Manager; therefore the
welcome page will often look different across organizations.
Initial Look
Immediately after you install NetDVMS, the welcome page will provide access to two features:
Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard Clients.
This initial look of the welcome page is automatically provided through the Download
Manager's default configuration—for more information, see Default Configuration of Download
Manager in the following.
77
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Default Configuration of Download Manager
The Download Manager has a default configuration. This ensures that your organization's
users can access standard features without the surveillance system administrator having to
set up anything.
The default configuration provides users with access to two features: Ocularis Client Lite and
NetGuard clients in language versions matching the language version of your NetDVMS
system.
The Download Manager's configuration is represented in a tree structure. Example: With an
English version of NetDVMS, the Download Manager's default configuration would be
represented in a tree structure like this.
Download Manager screen
78
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Download Manager's Tree Structure Explained
•
The first level of the tree structure simply indicates that you are working with
NetDVMS.
•
The second level refers to the languages in which the page is available. In the example, the
page is available in English, French, Chinese and Spanish.
•
The third level refers to the features which are—or can be made—available to users. In the
example, these features are limited to NetGuard-EVS and NetGuard.
•
The fourth level refers to particular versions of each feature, such as version 4.5e, which are—
or can be made—available to users.
•
The fifth level refers to the language versions of the features which are—or can be made—
available to users. In the example, only English versions are initially listed. This is because the
example is from an English version of NetDVMS; had you installed a Japanese version, only
Japanese versions would initially be listed.
In the example, NetDVMS has been installed an English-language version.
The fact that only standard features are initially available—and only in the same language version
as the surveillance system itself—helps reduce installation time and save space on the server.
There is simply no need to have a feature or language version available on the server if nobody is
going to use it.
You can, however, easily make more features and/or languages available as required. See Making
New Features Available in the following for more information.
Making New Features Available
Making new features—including new language versions—available to your organization's users
involves two procedures: First you install the required features on the surveillance system server.
You then use the Download Manager to fine-tune which features should be available in the various
language versions of the welcome page.
Installing New Features on Server
If the Download Manager is open, close it before installing new features on the server.
Installation files for NetGuard-EVS language versions, language packs, etc. are by default
available on your surveillance system server in a folder called Installers. The Installers folder is
located in the NetDVMS installation folder.
To install a feature from the Installers folder, select the required language sub-folder, then
double-click the required installation (.exe) file.
Tip: You can find more language versions of the NetGuard-EVS installer—and additional
language packs—on the NetDVMS software DVD.
When a new feature has been installed on the surveillance system server, you will see a
confirmation dialog. If required, you can open the Download Manager from the dialog.
79
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Making New Features Available through the Download
Manager
When you have installed new features—such as NetGuard-EVS language versions, language
packs, etc.—they will by default be selected in the Download Manager, and thus immediately be
available to users via the welcome page.
You can always show or hide features on the welcome page by selecting or clearing check boxes
in the Download Manager's tree structure.
Tip: You can change the sequence in which features and languages are displayed on the
welcome page: In the Download manager's tree structure, simply drag items and drop them at
the required position.
Hiding and Removing Features
You can remove features in several ways:
•
You can hide features from the welcome page by clearing check boxes in the Download
Manager's tree structure. In that case, the features will still be installed on the
surveillance system server, and by selecting check boxes in the Download Manager's tree
structure you can quickly make the features available again.
•
You can remove features which have previously been made available through the
Download Manager. This will remove the installation of the features on the surveillance
system server. The features will disappear from the Download Manager, but installation
files for the features will be kept in the surveillance system server's Installers folder, so
you can re-install them later if required.
•
1.
In the Download Manager, click the Remove features... button.
2.
In the Remove Features window, select the features you want to remove.
3.
Click OK. You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected
features. If you are sure, click the Yes button.
You can remove installation files for non-required features from the surveillance
system server. This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your
organization is not going to use certain features—typically non-relevant language
versions. See Removing Installation files for End-User Features for more information.
Virus Scanning Information
If you are using virus scanning software on the NetDVMS server, it is likely that the virus
scanning will use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download
Manager. If allowed in your organization, disable virus scanning on all or parts of the NetDVMS
server. For more information see Virus Scanning Information.
General Settings
The General Settings window lets you manage a variety of settings, such as user rights, e-mail and
SMS settings, logging, etc.
80
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Access: To access the General Settings window, click the General Settings... button in the
Administrator window.
The General Settings window is divided into a number of sections:
Administrator Settings
The Administrator Settings section lets you password protect access to the Administrator application.
When the Enable Protection check box is selected, users must supply the administrator password in
order to be able to access the Administrator application, and in order to be able to use any of the
features to which access has been restricted.
Changing the Administrator Password
To change the administrator password, click the Change Password... button to open the
Change Password window.
When an administrator password is in use, users accessing the Administrator application, or
wishing to use protected features, must type the administrator password in the window before
access is granted.
Manual Start Recording Settings
In the Manual start recordings settings section you can enable the possible to manually start
recording in NetGuard-EVS.
Select the check box Enable manual start recording to enable manually start of recording.
In the Default duration of manual recording [secs.]: field you can specify the number of seconds the
recording should last. Note that the minimum number of seconds you can specify is 30.
The Maximum duration of manual recording [secs.]: field is reserved for future usage.
NetCentral Settings
The NetCentral section lets you enable and configure access to the surveillance system from an OnSSI
event server in order to retrieve status information and alarms.
The default setting is that Enable NetCentral connections check box is selected.
Patrolling Settings
Note: Settings in this section are relevant only if you are using PTZ cameras for which patrolling has
been set up.
The regular patrolling of PTZ cameras may be interrupted, either manually or when a particular event
occurs. The Patrolling settings section lets you specify how many seconds should pass before the
regular patrolling is resumed after a manual or event-based interruption. Default is 30 seconds.
The settings in this section will apply for all installed PTZ cameras.
81
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
IMPORTANT: Users of NetGuard-EVS are—in addition to manual control—able to stop a selected PTZ
camera's patrolling entirely. This takes place through a context menu in the NetGuard-EVS view.
Therefore, for NetGuard-EVS users, the number of seconds specified in the Patrolling settings section
does only apply when users manually control a PTZ camera; not when users stop a PTZ camera's
patrolling entirely. When NetGuard-EVS users stop a PTZ camera's patrolling entirely, the camera's
patrolling will resume only when the NetGuard-EVS user selects to resume it.
Tip: PTZ patrolling for individual PTZ cameras is configured in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window.
Logfile Settings
The Logfile Settings section lets you specify where to keep the general log files containing information
about activity in the Administrator and recording server, and how long for.
Separate log files are generated for the Administrator and recording server service.
Logfile Path
By default, the Administrator and recording server log files are stored in the folder containing the
NetDVMS software.
To specify another location for your log files, type the path to the required folder in the Logfile
Path field, or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder.
Days to Log
A new log file is created every day. A log file older than the number of days specified in the Days
to log field is automatically deleted. By default, the log file will be stored for five days.
To specify another number of days, simply overwrite the value in the Days to log field.
The current day's activity is always logged, even with a value of 0 in the Days to log field. The
maximum number of days to log is 9999.
Tip: Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging.
Event Recording Settings
As opposed to the general log files, which contain information about activity on the surveillance
system itself, event log files contain information about registered events (for more information about
events, see About Input, Events & Output ...).
The Event Recording Settings section lets you specify where to keep event log files, and for how long.
Event log files should be viewed using NetGuard-EVS or Viewer:
•
NetGuard-EVS: In the Browse tab's Alerts section, select the required event, then click
the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected.
•
Viewer: Select the Viewer’s Alarm Overview control panel, then click the Events button to
view the events log.
Path
By default, event log files are stored in the folder containing the NetDVMS software.
82
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
To specify another location for your log files, type the path to the required folder in the Path field,
or click the browse button next to the field to browse to the required folder.
Days to Keep
A new event log file is created every day. Event log files older than the number of days specified
in the Days to keep field are automatically deleted. By default, event log files will be stored for
five days.
To specify another number of days, simply overwrite the value in the Days to keep field.
The current day's activity is always logged, even with a value of 0 in the Days to keep field. The
maximum number of days to log is 9999.
Tip: Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging.
Advanced
The Advanced section lets you specify a number of additional settings:
Check Box
Description
Don't send
e-mail on
camera
failures
If selected, no e-mail alerts will be sent if NetDVMS loses contact
with a camera.
Don't send
SMS on
camera
failures
If selected, no SMS alerts will be sent if NetDVMS loses contact with
a camera.
Start
cameras on
remote live
requests
Cameras may be stopped, for example because they have reached
the end of an online schedule, in which case NetGuard and
NetGuard-EVS users will not be able to view live video from the
cameras.
Otherwise, e-mail alerts will, provided the e-mail alert feature has
been enabled in the E-Mail setup window, automatically be sent if
NetDVMS loses contact with a camera, regardless of any e-mail
alerts periods defined in the Camera/Alert Scheduler window.
Otherwise, SMS alerts will, provided the SMS alert feature has been
enabled in the SMS settings window, automatically be sent if
NetDVMS loses contact with a camera, regardless of any e-mail
alerts periods defined in the Camera/Alert Scheduler window.
However, if Start cameras on remote live requests is selected,
NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS users will be able to start the camera
in order to view live video from the camera.
Create
default
schedule for
new
cameras
If selected (default), a schedule specifying that the camera is always
online (i.e. transferring video to NetDVMS will automatically be
created in the Camera/Alert Scheduler window. The automatically
created schedule can be edited manually at any time.
83
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
If not selected, no schedule will automatically be created; meaning
that the camera will not automatically be transferring video to
NetDVMS. When required, schedules can be added manually in the
Camera/Alert Scheduler window.
Email Settings
Clicking the Email Settings... button opens the E-Mail setup window, in which you enable and
configure the use of e-mail alerts.
Sms Settings
Clicking the Sms Settings... button opens the SMS settings window, in which you enable and configure
the use of SMS (mobile phone text message) alerts.
Note: Use of the SMS alert feature requires that an external Siemens TC-35 GSM modem has been
attached to a serial port on the computer running the NetDVMS software.
Change Password Window
The Change Password window lets you change the administrator password for your NetDVMS solution.
Access: To access the Change Password window, click the Change Password... button in the
General Settings window.
How to Change the Administrator Password
To change the administrator password, do the following:
1. Specify the current administrator password in the Old password field
2. Specify the new administrator password in the New password field
3. Repeat the new administrator password in the New password (confirm) field
4. Click OK.
84
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
NetCentral Settings Window
Note: Settings in the NetCentral Settings window are relevant only if you are using the NetCentral
add-on product in connection with NetDVMS.
The NetCentral Settings window lets you specify the login settings required for an NetCentral server to
access the surveillance system in order to retrieve status information and alarms.
Access: To access the NetCentral Settings window, click the Settings... button in the NetCentral
Settings section of the General Settings window.
Specify login settings for the NetCentral server in the following fields:
•
Login: Type the name of the NetDVMS server. The name must match the name specified on
the NetCentral server itself. Default name is Name.
•
Password: Type the password used for accessing the NetDVMS server. The password must
match the password specified on the NetCentral server itself. Default password is Pass.
•
Port: Type the port number to which the NetCentral server should connect when accessing
the NetDVMS server. The port number must match the port number specified on the
NetCentral server itself. Default port is 1237.
•
IP: When the NetCentral server retrieves alarms from the NetDVMS server, the NetDVMS
server includes information about its IP address in the alarm information. If the NetCentral
server accesses the NetDVMS server over the internet, or if the NetDVMS server has two or
more network adapters, you must specify the IP address to which the NetCentral server
should connect. If you do not specify an IP address, the IP address of the first network
adaptor found the NetDVMS server will be used.
E-Mail Setup Window
The E-Mail setup window lets you enable and configure the use of e-mail alerts. Such e-mail alerts can
automatically be sent to one or more recipients when motion is detected or specific events (see About
Input, Events & Output ...) occur.
By default, SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is used when sending e-mail alerts. Compared with
other mail transfer methods, SMTP has the advantage that you will avoid automatically triggered
warnings from your e-mail client when an e-mail alert is to be sent. Such automatically triggered
warnings may otherwise inform you that your e-mail client is trying to automatically send e-mail
messages on your behalf.
Access: To access the E-Mail setup window, click the Email Settings... button in the General Settings
window.
Enabling E-Mail Alerts
You enable the use of e-mail alerts separately for the Recording Server and—if applicable—the
Viewer application:
Note: When enabling e-mail alerts, also consider the e-mail alert schedules configured for each
camera in the Camera/Alert Scheduler window.
Enable E-Mail (Recording Server):
Select check box to enable the use of e-mail alerts when the Recording Server is running. E-mail
alerts will then be sent when the following conditions apply:
85
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
•
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
the Recording Server is running
motion is detected or an event, for which the sending of an e-mail alert has been
defined, occurs
motion is detected within a period of time for which an e-mail alert schedule has been
defined
Enable E-Mail (Viewer):
Select check box to enable the use of e-mail alerts in the Viewer application. In effect, this will
display the E-Mail Report button in the Viewer's toolbar, enabling users to send evidence via email. If you clear the check box, the E-Mail Report button will not be available in the Viewer's
toolbar.
Use of the e-mail feature is only possible when the Viewer is run on the surveillance system
server itself; not in a Viewer exported with video evidence.
Specifying Recipients
You specify the e-mail addresses to which e-mail alerts should be sent in the Recipient(s) field.
If specifying more than one e-mail address, separate the e-mail addresses with semicolons (example:
aa@aa.aa;bb@bb.bb;cc@cc.cc).
Note: If e-mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer, the content you specify in the Recipient(s) field will
appear as the default value in the Viewer's dialog for sending evidence via e-mail. Users will be able to
overwrite this default value.
Specifying Sender Settings
Specify sender information in the following fields:
Note: SSL (Secure Socket Layer) is not supported; if the sender belongs on a server that requires
SSL, the e-mail alerts will not work properly. Also, you may be required to disable any e-mail scanners
that could prevent the application sending the e-mail alert.
•
Sender e-mail address: Type the e-mail address you wish to appear as the sender of
the e-mail alert.
•
Outgoing mail (SMTP) server name: Type the name of the SMTP server which will be
used for sending the e-mail alerts.
•
Server requires login: Select check box if a user name and password is required to use
the SMTP server.
•
Username: Field available only when Server requires login is selected. Type the user
name required for using the SMTP server.
•
Password: Field available only when Server requires login is selected. Type the password
required for using the SMTP server.
Specifying Default Subject and Message Texts
Specify default subject and message texts in the following fields:
•
Subject text: Specify required subject text for e-mail alerts.
86
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Message text: Specify required message text for e-mail alerts. Note that camera
information as well as date and time information is automatically included in e-mail alerts.
Note: If e-mail alerts are enabled for the Viewer, the content you specify in the Subject text and
Message text fields will appear as default values in the Viewer's dialog for sending evidence via e-mail.
Users will be able to overwrite these default values.
Specifying Image and Interval Options
You are able to specify whether e-mail alerts should include images, and how much time should pass
between alerts per camera:
•
Include Image: Select check box to include images in e-mail alerts. When selected, a
JPG image from the time the triggering event occurred will be attached to each alert email.
•
Time btw. motion-related mails (minutes): Specify required minimum time (in
minutes) to pass between the sending of each e-mail alert per camera.
Note that this interval only applies for e-mail alerts generated by detected motion or
database-related events; e-mail alerts generated by other types of events will still be sent
out whenever the events occur.
Examples: If specifying 5, a minimum of five minutes will pass between the sending of
each motion- or database-related e-mail alert per camera, even if motion or database
events are detected in between. If specifying 0, e-mail alerts will be sent each time
motion or database events are detected, potentially resulting in a very large number of email alerts being sent. If using the value 0, you should therefore consider especially the
motion detection sensitivity configured for each camera in the Adjust Motion Detection
window.
Testing Your E-Mail Alert Configuration
You are able to test your e-mail alert configuration by clicking the Test button. This will send a test email to the specified recipients.
If Include Image is selected, the test e-mail will have a test JPG image attached.
87
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Image Server Administration
The Image Server provides access to the surveillance system for remote users logging in with
NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite, or NetGuard-EVS. If the NetPDA/NetCell Server front end is installed,
the Image Server also handles access for NetPDA/NetCell Client users.
The Image Server itself does not require separate hardware; it runs as a service on the surveillance
system server (i.e. the computer running the NetDVMS software). Surveillance system administrators
use the Image Server Administrator window to manage the Image Server's settings.
Access: You access the Image Server Administrator window from Windows' Start menu:
Select Start > All Programs > NetDVMS > Image Server Administrator. Alternatively, simply
double-click the Image Server Administrator desktop shortcut.
Each section of the Image Server Administrator window is described in the following:
Server Configuration Section
The Server Configuration section is used for specifying server name and port, for enabling optional
external access to the server, for optional definition of IP address ranges which should be recognized
as being local, and for specifying a maximum number of remote users allowed to connect
simultaneously.
The Server Configuration section contains the following fields and buttons:
Field, Button
Description
Name
Lets you specify a name for the server.
By default, the name is simply Server. You can of course change the
default name to a name of your choice.
NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS users with rights to configure their
clients will see the name of the server when they create views on
their client's Setup tab.
88
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Field, Button
Description
Port
Lets you specify a port number to use for the server.
The default port number is 80. You are able to change the default
port number.
Enable Outside
Access
Select the check box if the server should be accessible from the
internet via a router or firewall.
If selecting this option, also specify the outside (public) IP address
and port number in the Outside Address and Outside Port fields.
Note: When using outside access, the router or firewall used must
be configured so requests sent to the outside (public) IP address and
port are forwarded to the inside (local) IP address and port of the
server running the Image Server service.
Outside
Address
Lets you specify a public IP address or hostname for use when the
server should be available from the internet.
Outside Port
Lets you specify a port number for use when the server should be
available from the internet.
The default port number is 80. You are able to change the default
port number.
Local IP
Ranges...
Opens the Define local IP ranges window, in which you are able to
define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize
as coming from a local network.
Background:
When an OnSSI client connects to a surveillance system, an amount
of initial data communication, including the exchange of contact IP
addresses goes on in the background, completely automatically and
transparent to users.
However, when NetGuard, NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite on a
local network connects to a surveillance system which is also on the
local network, the Image Server may, if different subnets are
involved, not recognize the client’s IP address as being local.
When this is the case, the Image Server may not return a suitable IP
address to the OnSSI client for further communication between the
two.
Therefore, you are able to define a list of IP ranges which the Image
Server should recognize as coming from a local network, in which
case it will respond with a suitable IP address and seamless
communication will be possible.
89
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Field, Button
Description
Max. number of
clients
You are able to limit the number of access clients allowed to connect
at the same time. Depending on your NetDVMS configuration and
the performance of the hardware and network used, limiting the
number of simultaneously connected clients may help reduce server
load.
If more than the allowed number of simultaneously connected
access clients attempt to log in, only the allowed number of access
clients will be allowed access. Any access clients in excess of the
allowed number will receive an error message when attempting to
log in.
By default, a maximum of ten simultaneously connected access
clients are allowed.
To specify a different maximum number of access clients allowed to
connect at the same time, overwrite the value in the Max. number of
clients field with the required value.
Tip: To allow an unlimited number of simultaneously connected
access clients, type 0 (zero) in the Max. number of clients field.
Note: A four-minute session timeout period applies for access client
sessions on the Image Server. In many cases, access client users
may not notice this at all. However, the session timeout period will
be very evident in some cases, for example if you set the Max.
number of clients value to 1: When this is the case, and the single
allowed access client user logs out, four minutes must pass before it
will be possible to log in again.
User Administration Section
Accounts and rights for access client users are configured in the Image Server Administrator
window's User Administration section. Access client users must be defined in this section in order
to be able to log in to the surveillance system.
Defining Users
To define access client users, click the User Setup button. This will open the User
administration window, in which you define users.
Defining User Access Rights
Once you have defined users, you are able to define whether all users should have access to
all features in their access clients, including all available cameras, or whether access should be
restricted on an individual user basis.
Full Access for All Users
To give all users access to all features and all available cameras, select Full access for all
users.
90
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Restricted Access
To use restricted access, select Restrict user access. Then click the User Access... button to
open the Define User Rights window, in which you define access rights for each user.
Master/Slave Setup Section
You are able to create a master/slave setup of NetDVMS servers. A master/slave setup will allow
remote users to transparently connect to more than one server simultaneously: When remote users
connect to the master server, they will instantly get access to the slave servers as well.
How many master servers can I use in a master/slave setup? An unlimited number of
servers per SLC (Software License Code, specified during installation) can be designated as master
servers. If required—for example if your organization is very large and spread over many geographical
locations, or in case you want to create a redundancy solution—this allows you to use several master
servers in a master/slave setup.
How many slave servers can I use in a master/slave setup? An unlimited number of servers
can be defined as slave servers under a designated master server using the same Software License
Code.
Note: When using a master/slave setup, remote users and their rights must be defined in the Image
Server Administrator window on the master server as well as on each of the slave servers.
Note: Only cameras to which a remote user has been given access will be visible to the user,
regardless of whether the cameras are connected to the master server or to one of the slave servers.
Note: If they are to be accessed from the internet, Enable Outside Access must be selected on all
involved servers, and ports must be mapped accordingly in the routers and/or firewalls used.
Note: If upgrading the NetDVMS servers involved in a master/slave setup to NetDVMS 6.0 or later
from a previous NetDVMS version, a certain procedure is recommended. Read Upgrading Servers in an
Existing Master/Slave Setup in the following for more information.
Configuration on the Master Server
If the server you are configuring should be a master server, do the following:
1. Select the Designate as Master Server check box.
2. Next, define which other NetDVMS servers should act as slave servers. To define other
servers as slave servers, click the Slaves... button:
This will open the Slave Administration window, in which you are able to define all required
slave servers.
Configuration on a Slave Server
Apart from the notes listed above, no special master/slave configuration is required on a slave server;
simply do not specify anything in the Master/Slave Setup section:
91
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Not Using a Master/Slave Setup
If you do not wish to use a master/slave setup—for example because there is only a single NetDVMS
server on your system—simply do not specify anything in the Master/Slave Setup section.
Upgrading Servers in an Existing Master/Slave Setup
The servers involved in a master/slave setup should preferably all use the latest NetDVMS version. If
you only upgrade to NetDVMS 6.0 or later on the master server while letting the slave servers run a
previous version (e.g. NetDVMS 5.6), access client users will lose access to key functionality in their
client applications.
It is therefore highly recommended that you upgrade all the servers involved in an existing
master/slave setup to NetDVMS 6.0 or later.
When you do this, a certain procedure is recommended. The procedure ensures that remote users will
not experience any loss of functionality, not even during a transition period in which some servers
may run NetDVMS 6.0 or later while other servers still run a previous NetDVMS version:
1.
Install NetDVMS 6.0 or later on the master server.
2.
In the Image Server Administrator window on the master server, select the Pre-6.0
Version Slaves check box:
3.
Click OK to close the master server's Image Server Administrator window, thus restarting
the Image Server service.
4.
Upgrade the slave servers to NetDVMS 6.0 or later.
5.
When all of the slave servers have been upgraded, clear the Pre-6.0 Version Slaves check
box on the master server, and click OK to close the master server's Image Server
Administrator window, thus restarting the Image Server service.
Keep Transition Period as Short as Possible
It is recommended that you keep the transition period as short as possible, as client connections'
security will be considerably stronger once all servers involved in the master/slave setup have
been upgraded to NetDVMS 6.0 or later, and the master server's Pre-6.0 Version Slaves check
box has been cleared.
Also, while the Pre-6.0 Version Slaves check box is selected, the Image Server Administrator
window's Max. Number of Clients feature will only apply for NetGuard, not for NetGuard-EVS.
Log Files Section
In the Log Files section, specify the number of days to keep log files in the Image Server's regular
event log. By default, such log files are kept for ten days before they are deleted.
92
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Tip: Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging.
Audit Log Section
Audit logging is the logging of access client user actions.
If this type of logging is required, select the Enable Audit Logging check box.
When audit logging is enabled, you are able to specify the following values:
•
Days to log: Number of days in which audit log files should be kept before they are
overwritten. Default is 30 days. If you specify 0 (zero), audit log files will be kept indefinitely
(disk storage space permitting).
•
Minimum Logging Interval: Minimum number of seconds between logged events. Specifying
a high number of seconds between logged events may help reduce the size of the audit log.
Default is 60 seconds.
•
In Sequence Timespan: Maximum number of seconds to pass for viewed images to be
considered to be within the same sequence. Specifying a high number of seconds may thus
help limit the number of viewed sequences logged, and reduce the size of the audit log.
Default is ten seconds.
Tip: Read more about NetDVMS logging in About Logging.
Language Support and XML Encoding Section
In the Language Support and XML Encoding section, select the language/character set used by the
NetDVMS server and access clients.
Example: If the NetDVMS server runs a Japanese version of Windows, select Japanese. Provided
access clients also use a Japanese version of Windows, this will ensure that the right language and
character encoding is used in clients' communication with the server.
If using a master/slave setup, remember to specify the same language/character set on all involved
servers.
Good to know: Client Access to Live Video from Stopped
Cameras
Access client users are able to view live video from cameras even though the cameras in question are
not online (online means that the camera delivers a video stream to the surveillance system server, as
defined in the Camera/Alert Scheduler Window). This, however, requires that a particular setting in
the Administrator application is enabled. To enable the required setting, open the Administrator
application, and do the following:
1. In the Administrator window, click the General Settings... button. This will open the General
Settings window.
2. In the General Settings window's Advanced section, select Start cameras on remote live
requests.
3. Click OK.
93
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Local IP Ranges
The Define local IP ranges window lets you define IP address ranges which the Image Server should
recognize as coming from a local network.
Access: You access the Define local IP ranges window by clicking the Local IP Ranges... button in
the Image Server Administrator window.
To define a local IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window, do the following:
1.
Specify the beginning of the IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window's first field,
and the end of the IP address range in the second field.
2.
Click the Add button. The IP address range will be added to the list in the lower part of the
Define local IP ranges window.
You may define as many local IP address ranges as required. If required, an IP address range
may include only one IP address (example: 192.168.10.1-192.168.10.1).
3.
When ready, click the Define local IP ranges window's Close button to return to the Image
Server Administrator window.
Tip: There is no feature for editing an already defined IP address range in the Define local IP ranges
window. However, you can simply select the range in question in the Define local IP ranges window's
list, delete it by clicking the Delete button, and then simply add a new range reflecting your
requirements.
Slave Servers
The Image Server Administrator's Slave Administration window lets you define all servers required to
run as slave servers under the NetDVMS server you are configuring.
Remember that only one server can be the master server. Any number of servers can be defined as
slave servers under the master server.
94
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Access: You access the Slave Administration window by clicking the Slaves... button in the Image
Server Administrator window.
Adding a Slave Server
To add a slave server, click the Slave Administration window's Add Slave... button, specify the
host name of the slave server, specify the required port number, and click OK. This will add the
slave server to the Slave Administration window's list of slave servers.
Tip: Instead of specifying a host name when adding a slave server, you may specify the IP
address of the slave server. Simply type the IP address in the Hostname field when adding the
slave server. Remember that if on a local network, the local IP address of the slave server must
be used.
Before you start using your master/slave setup, remember to verify that:
•
Required users have be defined on the master server as well as on each of the slave
servers.
•
Outside Access has been enabled on all involved servers, and ports mapped accordingly in
the routers or firewalls used, if the slave servers are to be accessed from the internet.
Removing a Slave Server
To remove a slave server from the Slave Administration window's list of slave servers, select the
slave server in the list and click the Delete Slave button.
Users & User Rights
The Image Server Administrator's User administration window lets you define access client users.
95
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Access: You access the User administration window by clicking the User Setup... button in the
Image Server Administrator window.
You are able to add new users in two ways, which may be combined.
•
Basic user: Lets you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user
name and password authentication for each individual user. If the NetPDA/NetCell Server is
installed, this method works for NetPDA/NetCell Client users.
•
Windows user: Lets you import individual users or groups defined locally on the server, or
users/groups from Active Directory, and authenticate them based on their Windows login. This
method does not work for NetPDA/NetCell Client users. Using Active Directory requires that a
server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller is available on your
network.
What Is Active Directory?
Active Directory is a distributed directory service included with several Windows Server operating
systems; it identifies resources on a network in order for users or applications to access them. Users
and, if required, groups of users are specified centrally in Active Directory.
In short, the benefits of importing user data from Active Directory are that: Administrators do not
have to create separate user accounts for accessing the surveillance system because user
authentication will be handled centrally by Active Directory. Administrators can import groups of users
in one go if required. Users can basically just use their Windows login when accessing the surveillance
system; no need to memorize separate user names and passwords.
Prerequisites
The Image Server managing the remote access verifies NetGuard-EVS Client users' identities
using NTLM challenge handshake with a Microsoft Domain Controller.
In order to be able to import users and groups through Active Directory, a server with Active
Directory installed and acting as domain controller must be available on your network. Consult
your network administrator if in doubt.
User and Group Concepts
Active Directory uses the concepts of users and groups.
USERS
Users are Active Directory objects representing individuals with a user account. Example:
96
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
GROUPS
Groups are Active Directory objects that can contain several users. In this example the
Management group contains three users:
Groups can contain any number of users. By importing a group into NetDVMS, you are able to
import all of its members in one go.
The number of groups may vary from organization to organization, depending on the structure
and requirements of each organization.
Note that a user can be a member of more than one group. For instance, Adolfo Rodriguez
from our fictitious example above could easily be a member of the organization's Management
group as well as of its Sales group and its Staff Social Club group.
Each of the two methods is described in the following:
How to Add a New Basic User
To define a new dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user name and
password authentication, click the User administration window's Add Basic User... button,
specify required user name and password, and click OK.
This will add the user to the User administration window's list of users. In the list's Type
column, the user will appear as a Basic User. A Basic user is furthermore indicated by a blue
dot next to the user icon.
How to Add a New Windows User or Group
Note: This method only works for users who will access the surveillance system through NetGuardEVS, Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard. If your users will access the surveillance system with a
NetPDA/NetCell Client, add the users as Basic users instead.
You add a new Windows user or group by importing information about the user/group from a local
database on the surveillance system server or from Active Directory:
•
In the User administration window, click the Add Windows User... button. This will open the
Select Users or Groups window:
By default, you will be able to make selections from your entire directory. If you want to
narrow this, click the Select Users and Groups window's Locations... button, and select the
location you require.
97
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
In the Enter the object names to select box, type the required user or group names, then use
the Check Names feature to verify that the user and/or group names you have entered are
recognized.
Note: If typing several user and/or group names, separate each name with a semicolon.
Example: Alonso; Sarah Walters; Management; Brian; Security; Hannah Carter; Stanislaw;
Dwayne Smith
Tip: Typing part of a user or group name is often enough. Example: Typing John, then clicking
the Check Names button, may be enough to quickly select the user Johnathan Smith.
•
When ready, click OK. The required users and/or groups will be imported, and listed in the
User administration window.
A user imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory User in the list's Type
column. The user will furthermore be indicated by a user icon without the blue dot used for Basic
users.
A group imported this way will appear as a Windows or Active Directory Group in the list's Type
column. The group will furthermore be indicated by a group icon.
How to Edit an Existing User Name or Password
Editing an existing user's user name or password is only possible if the user in question is of the type
Basic user; the details of Windows users imported from Active Directory are edited through Active
Directory.
To edit the user name or password for an existing Basic user, do the following:
•
Select the required user in the Current users list, and click the Change password... button.
•
Edit the user name and/or password as required, then click OK.
Remember to inform the user about the change.
How to Remove an Existing User
To remove a user from the User administration window's list of users, select the user in the list and
click the Delete button. When removed from the list, the user will no longer be able to log in.
Note: Using this method to delete a Windows user imported from Active Directory will only remove
the user's right to log in with a access client; it will not remove the user's data from Active Directory.
What Information to Provide to Users
The information you need to provide in order to enable users to effortlessly log in to the surveillance
system depends on whether the users are using NetGuard, NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite . For
NetPDA/NetCell Client users, see Using the NetPDA/NetCell Client.
NetGuard Users
When users log in with NetGuard, they must select between using basic or Windows-based
authentication. Provide them with the following information:
98
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
•
Address: IP address or hostname of the Image Server.
•
Port: Port to use when accessing the Image Server, e.g. 80.
•
Authentication: In NetGuard's login dialog, users will be asked to select between
basic authentication or Windows-based authentication. Windows-based authentication
may in turn be based on the currently logged-in Windows user.
o
If using basic user name and password authentication, tell users that the
required authentication is called Basic.
o
If using Windows-based authentication based on the currently logged-in
Windows user, tell users that the required authentication is called Windows
(current user).
o
If using Windows-based authentication which should not necessarily be based
on the currently logged-in Windows user, tell users that the required
authentication is called Windows.
•
User name: Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication.
Remember that user names are case sensitive, so make it clear to the users if any
parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case.
•
Password: Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication. If
using basic authentication, users should enter their passwords exactly as you have
specified them on the Image Server.
NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite Users
When users log in to NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite, they must select between using
basic or Windows-based authentication. Provide them with the following information:
•
Server Address: IP address or hostname of the Image Server, plus any port number
required. In NetGuard-EVS's login dialog, users will enter this information in a single
field called Server Address, so if the IP address is 123.123.123.123 and the port
number is 80, tell users that the Server Address is 123.123.123.123:80.
•
Authentication: In the login dialog, users will be asked to select between basic
authentication or Windows-based authentication. Windows-based authentication may
in turn be based on the currently logged-in Windows user.
•
o
If using basic user name and password authentication, tell users that the
required authentication is Basic authentication.
o
If using Windows-based authentication based on the currently logged-in
Windows user, tell users that the required authentication is Windows
authentication (current user).
o
If using Windows-based authentication which should not necessarily be based
on the currently logged-in Windows user, tell users that the required
authentication is Windows authentication.
User name: Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication.
Remember that user names are case sensitive, so make it clear to the users if any
parts of their user names should specifically be upper or lower case.
99
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
Password: Only required if using Basic authentication or Windows authentication. If
using basic authentication, users should enter their passwords exactly as you have
specified them on the Image Server.
o
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Users with Basic authentication or Windows authentication will have the option
of selecting Remember password, which will help them speed up subsequent
login procedures. Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature.
Auto-login: Users will have the option of selecting Auto-login, in which case
NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite will automatically start up and log in with the
selected authentication method each time Windows is started (for Basic authentication
and Windows authentication this will require that Remember password is selected).
Inform users whether they are allowed to use this feature.
Define User Rights Window
The Image Server's Define User Rights window lets you define access rights for access client users.
Access: You access the Define User Rights window by clicking the User Access... button in the
Image Server Administrator window. The button is only available if you have selected the Image
Server Administrator window's Restrict user access option button.
Prerequisites: Before you define user rights, you should define users. You do this by clicking the
Image Server Administrator window's User Setup... button.
To define access rights for a particular user, do the following in the Define User Rights window:
1.
In the User list, select the required user or group.
2.
In the Global User Rights section, select the user's/group's global (i.e. non-camera-specific)
rights:
•
View Live: Ability to view the Live tab/mode in NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite or
NetGuard-EVS. If a user/group does not have this right, the Live tab/mode will not be
selectable in the OnSSI client.
•
Browse: Ability to Browse in NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS. If a
user/group does not have this right, the Browse tab/mode will not be selectable in the
OnSSI client.
•
Setup: Ability to view perform Setup functions in NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite or
NetGuard-EVS. If a user/group does not have this right, the Setup function will not be
available in the OnSSI client.
•
Edit Shared Views: Ability to create and edit views in shared groups in the OnSSI
client. Views placed in shared groups can be accessed by every NetGuard/Ocularis
Client Lite/NetGuard-EVS user (for more information about views, see the separate
NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS documentation). If a user/group
does not have this right, shared groups in the OnSSI client will be protected, indicated
by a padlock icon.
Note: Views created in a NetGuard can only be shared with other NetGuard users.
Views created in a NetGuard-EVS can only be shared with other NetGuard-EVS
users. It is not possible to share views across the two types of client.
100
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Edit Private Views: Ability to create and edit views in private groups in the OnSSI
client. Views placed in private groups can only be accessed by NetGuard/Ocularis
Client Lite/NetGuard-EVS user who created them (for more information about views,
see the separate NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS documentation). If
a user/group does not have this right, private groups in the OnSSI client will be
protected, indicated by a padlock icon. Denying remote users the right to create their
own views may make sense in some cases; for example in order to limit bandwidth
use.
Tip: By clearing the View Live, Browse and Setup check boxes you can effectively disable
the user's/group's ability to use the OnSSI client, for example while the user is on vacation.
This would typically be a temporary alternative to deleting the user/group.
3.
In the User Rights for Camera section's Defined Cameras list, select each camera to which the
user/group should have access in the access client.
Tip: By pressing the CTRL or SHIFT buttons on your keyboard while selecting cameras in
the Defined Cameras list, you are able to select several or all of the listed cameras in one go.
4.
Click the >> button to move the selected cameras to the Viewable by selected user list.
5.
For each camera now listed in the Viewable by selected user list, specify the features to which
the user/group should have access, by selecting the features in the User Rights for the
Selected Camera section.
Note that the features are listed in two columns: the left column lists features related to live
viewing, the right column lists features related to browsing existing recordings:
In the Live column, the following features, all selected by default, are available:
•
Live: Ability to view live video from the selected camera.
•
PTZ: Ability to use navigation features for PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) cameras. A user/group
will only be able to use this right if having access to one or more PTZ cameras.
•
PTZ Preset Positions: Ability to use navigation features for moving a PTZ camera to
particular preset positions. A user/group will only be able to use this right if having
access to one or more PTZ cameras with defined preset positions.
•
Outputs: Ability to trigger outputs (e.g. switching on lights, sounding sirens, or
similar), if such outputs are available.
•
Events: Ability to use NetGuard-EVS's or Ocularis Client Lite's Event feature for
manually triggering events.
•
Listen to microphone: Ability to listen to live audio from the selected camera's
microphone(s) (available only if the selected camera has microphone(s) attached).
Note: The Listen to microphone feature is available in NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis
Client Lite only.
•
Talk to speaker: Ability to talk to the selected camera's speaker(s) (available only if
the selected camera has speaker(s) attached).
Note: The Talk to speaker feature is available in NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client
Lite only.
101
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
In the Browse column, the following features, all selected by default, are available:
•
Browse: Ability to browse recorded video from the selected camera.
•
AVI/JPG Export: Ability to generate and export evidence as movie clips in the AVI
format and as still images in the JPG format.
•
Database Export: Ability to generate and export evidence in database format.
Note: The Database Export feature is available in NetGuard-EVS only.
•
Sequences: Ability to use the Sequences feature for browsing video from a selected
camera.
•
Smart Search: Ability to use NetGuard-EVS's Smart Search feature, with which users
are able to search for motion in one or more selected areas of images from the
selected camera.
Note: The Database Export feature is available in NetGuard-EVS only.
•
Audio: Ability to listen to recorded audio from the selected camera's microphone(s)
(available only if the selected camera has microphone(s) attached)
Note: The Audio feature is available in NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite only.
Tip: Note that some of the features are mutually dependent: For example, in order have
access to PTZ or output features, a user must also have access to viewing live video; and in
order to use AVI and JPG export, a user must have access to browsing recorded video.
6.
Repeat as required for other users/groups.
What if a user is a member of a group which has different rights than the user itself?
When this is the case—for example when the user Paul himself has been given rights to do A and B,
whereas the Security Staff group of which Paul is a member has been given rights to do A, B, and C—
the sum of the rights will apply for the user. Paul in our example would then—due to his group
membership—have rights to do A, B, and C.
102
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Input, Events & Output
Input received from a wide variety of sources can be used to generate events in NetDVMS.
Events can in turn be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS, such as starting or
stopping recording on cameras, triggering e-mail or SMS notifications, making PTZ cameras move to
specific preset positions, making video automatically appear on NetMatrix recipients, etc. Events can
also be used for activating output.
Output units can be attached to output ports on many devices, allowing you to activate lights, sirens,
etc. from NetDVMS. Such external output can be activated automatically by events, or manually from
NetGuard/NetGuard-EVS/Ocularis Client Lite.
Types of Events
You specify which types of input should generate which types of events. Basically, four types of events
exist:
•
On many devices you are able to attach external input units to input ports on the device.
Events based on input from such external input units—typically sensors attached to doors,
windows, etc.—are called input events. Some devices also have their own capabilities for
detecting motion, for detecting moving and/or static objects, etc. (typically configured in the
devices' own software), in which case you are also able to use such detections from the device
as input events.
•
Input may also be received in the form of TCP or UDP data packages, which can be analyzed
and, if matching specified criteria, used to generate events. Such events are called generic
events.
•
Events may be based on NetDVMS detecting motion on a camera. Such events are called VMD
(i.e. Video Motion Detection) events.
•
Finally, events may be generated manually by users selecting them in their access clients.
Such manually selectable events are traditionally called event buttons.
Specifying Input, Events and Output
In NetDVMS, your main entry point for configuration of input, event and output handling is the
Administrator window:
•
By clicking the Administrator window's I/O Setup... button, you open the I/O Setup window, in which you
are able to specify each individual input event, VMD event and output.
•
By clicking the Administrator window's Event Buttons... button, you open the Event Buttons
window, in which you are able to specify event buttons for manually triggering eventscontrolled activity.
•
By clicking the Administrator window's Generic Events... button, you open the Generic Events
window, in which you are able to specify generic events.
•
By clicking the Administrator window's I/O Control... button, you open the I/O Control window, in which
you are able to associate specific events with specific output. This way you can, for example, specify
that when motion is detected on a camera (typically specified as a VMD event) a siren should
103
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
automatically sound (output). If you want users to be able to manually activate output when operating
specific cameras, you specify this in the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
Note: Before you specify use of external input and output units on a device, verify that sensor
operation is recognized by the device. Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration
interfaces, or via CGI script commands. Also check the release notes to verify that input and output
controlled operations are supported for the device and firmware used.
Note: If you are using several NetDVMS servers in your surveillance solution, input and output on a
specific device should be defined on one of the servers only. Do not define the same input or output
on the same device on several servers. This applies even for dedicated I/O devices (see also Using
Dedicated I/O Devices).
Using Dedicated I/O Devices
In addition to IP video camera devices and IP video encoder devices it is possible to add a number of
dedicated I/O (input/output) devices to NetDVMS (see How to Add a Device). For information about
which I/O devices are supported, refer to the release note.
When such I/O devices are added, input on the I/O devices can be used to generate events in
NetDVMS, and events in NetDVMS can be used for activating output on the I/O devices. This means
that I/O devices can be used in your events-based system setup in the same way as a camera.
Note: When using some I/O devices it is necessary for the surveillance system to regularly check the
state of the devices' input ports in order to detect whether input has been received. Such state
checking at regular intervals is called polling. The interval between state checks, called a polling
frequency, is specified in the Advanced window. For such I/O devices, the polling frequency should be
set to the lowest possible value (one tenth of a second between state checks). For information about
which I/O devices require polling, see the release note.
I/O Setup
The I/O Setup window lets you define input events, VMD (Video Motion Detection) events and output
for devices on your surveillance system.
When events occur, they can trigger one or more actions:
•
Input events occur when input from an external input unit is received on a device's input port,
for example when an external sensor detects that a door is opened. Some devices also have
their own capabilities for detecting motion, for detecting moving and/or static objects, etc.
(configured in the devices' own software; typically by accessing a browser-based configuration
interface on the device's IP address), in which case such detections from the device can also
be used as input events.
•
VMD events occur when NetDVMS detects motion on a particular camera.
•
Outputs are used for activating external output units, for example for switching on lights or
sounding a siren.
The I/O Setup window is used for defining which input events, VMD events and outputs should be
available on your system.
Input and VMD events can be used for triggering outputs or for triggering various actions on the
surveillance system itself, such as for starting or stopping cameras (configured in the Camera/Alert
Scheduler window) or for moving a PTZ camera to a particular preset position (configured in the Event
window (for PTZ preset positions on event)).
104
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Once you have defined input events, VMD events and outputs, you are able to associate specific input
events or VMD events with specific outputs in the I/O Control window, so that, for example, lights are
switched on when a door is opened or when motion is detected on a camera. Outputs may also be
triggered by motion detection on a specific camera—even without a defined VMD event—or manually
through NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite; these are configured in the Output Settings for [Device
Name] [Camera Name] window.
The I/O Setup window
Access: You access the I/O Setup window by clicking the I/O Setup... button in the Administrator
window.
Note: Before you specify inputs and outputs for a device, verify that sensor operation is recognized by
the device. Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces, or via CGI script
commands. Also check the release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are
supported for the device and firmware used.
I/O Setup Window's Defined Events List and Buttons
The I/O Setup window features a Defined events list, in which input, output and VMD (Video Motion
Detection) events defined for each device are listed.
The window furthermore features a number of buttons for use when adding and configuring the
events:
Button
Description
Add new
event...
Used for defining input events on the device selected in the Defined
events list.
Depending on the type of device, you may be able to define one or
more input events on the device. Some devices do not support
input/output at all. Refer to the release notes for device-specific
information.
Devices Capable of Handling One Input Event Only
If the device is capable of handling one input event only, the button
will open the Add New Event window (for devices capable of
handling one input event only), in which you define the input event,
and any e-mail or SMS alerts to be associated with it.
If you have already defined an input event on a device capable of
handling one input event only, the Add new event... button will not
be available when the device is selected in the Defined events list.
105
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
However, if you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined
events list, and select the defined input event, the Add new event...
button becomes available for defining timer events (see Timer
Events in the following).
Devices Capable of Handling Several Input Events
If the device is capable of handling more than one input event, the
button will open the Multiple Input Events window, in which you
define which of the device's possible input events should be enabled,
and whether any alerts should be associated with enabled input
events.
Timer Events
When you click the plus sign next to the device in the Defined events
list, and select a defined input event, the Add new event... button
becomes available for defining timer events: When clicked, the
button will open the New Timer window, in which you are able to
specify the settings for timer events.
Timer events are separate events, triggered by the input event
under which they are defined. Timer events occur a specified
number of seconds or minutes after the input event under which
they are defined.
Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes; the
following are examples only:
•
A camera starts based on an input event, e.g. when a door
is opened, a timer event stops the camera after 15 seconds
•
A camera starts and the lights are switched on based on an
input event, e.g. when a door is opened, a timer event stops
the camera after one minute, and another timer event
switches the lights off after two minutes
Add new
output
event...
Opens the Add New Output window, in which you are able to specify
a name for the required output, which of the device's output ports to
use, and how long to keep the output for.
Add VMD
Event
(Motion
Detection)
Lets you add a VMD (Video Motion Detection) event to the device
selected in the Defined Events list.
VMD events are events triggered when NetDVMS detects motion on
a specific camera, based on the motion detection settings defined in
the Adjust Motion Detection window.
Note: In addition to NetDVMS's motion detection, some devices also
have their own capabilities for detecting motion (configured in the
devices' own software; typically by accessing a browser-based
configuration interface on the device's IP address). Events based on
106
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
motion detected on a device itself are not VMD Events; they are
input events, since they are based on input from the device.
VMD events can be used just like regular input events. For example,
a PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) camera could move to a specific preset
position when a VMD event occurs.
Only one VMD event can be defined per camera.
In order to avoid the risk of an excessively high number of VMD
events being generated, a VMD event cannot occur more frequently
than every five seconds.
The Add VMD Event (Motion Detection) button works slightly
different depending on whether the selected device is a singlecamera device or a multi-camera device, such as a video encoder:
Edit
selected...
•
Single-camera devices: Clicking the Add VMD Event
(Motion Detection) button will instantly add a VMD event to
the selected device, provided a VMD event has not already
been defined for the device.
•
Multi-camera devices: Clicking the Add VMD Event (Motion
Detection) button will open a simple dialog in which you
select the required camera. This way you are able to define
a VMD event for each camera on a multi-camera device.
Lets you edit the settings for an item selected in the Defined events
list.
For devices capable of handling a single input event only, the button
will open the Edit Event window (for editing input events).
For devices capable of handling several input events, the button will
open the Multiple Input Events window.
If the selected item is a timer event, the button will open the New
Timer window.
If the selected item is an output, the button will open the Edit
Output window.
Remove
selected
Lets you remove an event selected in the Defined events list.
Advanced...
Opens the Advanced window, in which you are able to specify
network settings to be used in connection with event handling:
which ports to use for FTP, alerts and SMTP input/output events as
well as which polling frequency to use on devices requiring polling.
Note: The selected event will be removed without further warning.
107
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Input Events
The Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling one input event only) lets you specify the
settings for an input event on devices capable of handling one input event only.
The Add New Event window (for
devices capable of handling one
input event only)
Access: You access the Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling one input event
only) by selecting the required device and clicking the Add new event... button in the I/O Setup
window. Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input
event only. Some devices are capable of handling several input events, in which case a different
window, the Multiple Input Events window, will open when the Add new event... button is clicked.
Note: Before you specify input events for a device, verify that sensor operation is recognized by the
device. Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces, or via CGI script
commands. Also check the NetDVMS release note to verify that input-controlled operations are
supported for the device and firmware used.
Add New Event Window's Fields
The Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling one input event only) contains the
following fields:
Field, Check
Box
Description
External
sensor
connected
to
Read-only field, displaying the name of the device on which the
input event is defined.
Sensor
connected
through
Lets you select which of the device's input ports the sensor used for
the input event is connected to.
Event
occurs
when input
goes
Lets you select whether input event should be triggered when the
signal on the input sensor rises or falls:
•
Low: Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is
falling
•
High: Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is
108
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field, Check
Box
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
rising
For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising
signal respectively, refer to documentation for the sensor and device
in question.
External
event name
Lets you specify a name for the input event.
Note: Event names must not contain the following characters: < >
&'"\/:*?|[]
Note: Some camera devices only support event names of a certain
length and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Send e-mail
if this event
occurs
Select check box to send an e-mail alert when the input occurs.
Include
image from
camera
Available only if the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box is
selected.
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
Select check box to include an image, recorded at the time the input
event is triggered, in the e-mail alert, then select the required
camera in the list next to the check box.
Send SMS if
this event
occurs
Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
Edit Event Window
The Edit Event window (for editing input events) lets you edit the settings for an existing input event
on devices capable of handling one input event only.
109
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
The Edit Event window (for editing
input events)
Access: You access the Edit Event window (for editing input events) by selecting the required
device and clicking the Edit selected... button in the I/O Setup window.
Note that this only applies when the selected device is capable of handling a single input event only.
Some devices are capable of handling several input events, in which case a different window, the
Multiple Input Events window, will open when the Edit selected... button is clicked.
Edit Event Window's Fields
The Edit Event window (for editing input events) contains the following fields:
Field
Description
External
sensor
connected
to
Read-only field, displaying the name of the device on which the
input event is defined.
Sensor
connected
through
Lets you select which of the device's input ports the sensor used for
the input event should be connected to.
Event
occurs
when input
goes
Lets you select whether the input event should be triggered when
the signal on the input sensor rises or falls:
•
Low: Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is
falling
•
High: Trigger input event when the signal on the sensor is
rising
For exact information about what constitutes a falling and a rising
signal respectively, refer to documentation for the sensor and device
in question.
External
event name
Lets you edit the name of the input event.
Note: Event names must not contain the following characters: < >
&'"\/:*?|[]
Note: Some camera devices only support event names of a certain
length and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Send e-mail
if this event
occurs
Select check box to send an e-mail alert when the input occurs.
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
110
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Field
Description
Include
image from
camera
Available only if the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box is
selected.
Send SMS if
this event
occurs
Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs.
Select check box to include an image, recorded at the time the input
event is triggered, in the e-mail alert, then select the required
camera in the list next to the check box.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
Multiple Input Events Window
The Multiple Input Events window is used for devices capable of handling several input events. It lets
you define which of the device's possible input events should be enabled, and whether any alerts
should be associated with enabled input events.
The Multiple Input Events window
Note: Before you specify input events for a device, verify that sensor operation is recognized by the
device. Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces, or via CGI script
commands. Also check the release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are
supported for the device and firmware used.
Access: You access the Multiple Input Events window by clicking the Add new event... button in the
I/O Setup window. Note that this only applies when the device selected in the I/O Setup window is
capable of handling several input events. Some devices are capable of handling a single input event
only, in which case a different window, the Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling
one input event only), will open when the Add new event... button is clicked.
111
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Multiple Input Events Window's Fields and Buttons
The Multiple Input Events window contains the following fields and buttons:
Field
Description
Input
events for
device
Read-only field, displaying the name of the device on which the
input events are defined.
Available
Input
Event(s)
Lists available input events for the device, typically with an input
event for rising and falling signals on each of the device's input
ports.
For exact information about what constitutes the various input
events, refer to documentation for the sensors and device in
question.
My list contains event related to motion and/or object
detection; what's this? Some devices have their own capabilities
for detecting motion and/or moving/static objects. A motion or
object detection-related input event is very likely to be an option
from such a device. The settings determining this kind of detection
are configured on the device itself; typically by accessing a browserbased configuration interface on the device's IP address. For more
information, refer to the documentation for the device in question.
Enabled
Input
Event(s)
Lists enabled input events for the device.
>>
You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event(s)
list, then clicking the >> button to open the Add New Event window
(for devices capable of handling several input events) in which you
specify a name for the input event, and any e-mail or SMS alerts to
be associated with it.
You enable an event by selecting it in the Available Input Event(s)
list, then clicking the >> button. See description in the following.
When you click OK in the Add New Event window (for devices
capable of handling several input events), the selected input event is
automatically transferred from Available Input Event(s) list to the
Enabled Input Event(s) list.
<<
Lets you move an input event selected in the Enabled Input Event(s)
list to the Available Input Event(s) list, thus disabling it.
Edit
Lets you edit the settings for an input event selected in the Enabled
Input Event(s) list.
112
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Add New Event Window
The Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling several input events) lets you specify the
settings for a particular input event on devices capable of handling several input events.
The Add New Event window for
devices capable of handling
several input events
Access: You access the Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling several input
events) by clicking the >> button in the Multiple Input Events window.
Note: Before you specify input events for a device, verify that sensor operation is recognized by the
device. Most devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces, or via CGI script
commands. Also check the release notes to verify that input and output controlled operations are
supported for the device and firmware used.
Add New Event Window's Fields
The Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling several input events) contains the
following fields:
Field, Check
Box
Description
External
event name
Lets you specify a name for the particular input event.
Note: Event names must not contain the following characters: < >
&'"\/:*?|[]
Note: Some camera devices only support event names of a certain
length and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Send email
if this event
occurs
Select check box to send an e-mail alert when the input occurs.
Include
image from
camera
Available only if the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box is
selected.
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
Select check box to include an image, recorded at the time the input
event is triggered, in the e-mail alert, then select the required
camera in the list below the check box.
113
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Field, Check
Box
Description
Send SMS if
this event
occurs
Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
Add New Output
The Add New Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device.
The Add New Output window
Note: Before you specify output for a device, verify that the output is supported by the device. Most
devices are capable of showing this in their configuration interfaces, or via CGI script commands. Also
check the NetDVMS release note to verify that output is supported for the device and firmware used.
Access: You access the Add New Output window by selecting the required device and clicking the
Add new output event... button in the I/O Setup window. If the device does not support output, the
button will not be available.
Add New Output Window's Fields
The Add New Output window contains the following fields:
Field
Description
External
output
connected
to
Read-only field, displaying the name of the device on which the
output event is defined.
Output
connected
on
Lets you select which of the device's output ports the output is
connected to. Many cameras only have a single output port; in that
case simply select Output 1.
Keep output
for
Lets you specify the amount of time for which the output should be
applied.
Specify the required amount of time in either 1/10 seconds or
seconds. Example: The output should be kept for five tenths of a
second.
Note: Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively
114
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
short time, for example max. five seconds. Refer to the
documentation for the device in question for exact information.
External
output
name
Lets you specify a name for the output. The name will appear on the
button/list with which users will be able to manually trigger the
output.
Note: Output names must not contain the following characters: < >
&'"\/:*?|[]
Note: Some camera devices only support output names of a certain
length and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Testing the Defined Output
When you have defined settings for the output in question, you are able to test the output by clicking
the Test Output button.
Edit Output Window
The Edit Output window lets you specify the settings for an output on a device.
The Edit Output window
Access: You access the Edit Output window by selecting the required output in the I/O Setup
window, then clicking the Edit selected... button.
115
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Edit Output Window's Fields
The Edit Output window contains the following fields:
Field
Description
External
output
connected
to
Read-only field, displaying the name of the device on which the
output event is defined.
Output
connected
on
Lets you edit which of the device's output ports the output is
connected to.
Keep output
for
Lets you edit the amount of time for which the output should be
applied.
Specify the required amount of time in either 1/10 seconds or
seconds. Example: The output should be kept for five tenths of a
second.
Note: Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively
short time, for example max. five seconds. Refer to the
documentation for the device in question for exact information.
External
output
name
Lets you edit the name of the output.
Note: Output names must not contain the following characters: < >
&'"\/:*?|[]
Note: Some camera devices only support output names of a certain
length and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Testing the Defined Output
When you have defined settings for the output in question, you are able to test the output by clicking
the Test Output button.
Ports & Polling
The Advanced window lets you specify network settings to be used in connection with event
handling.
116
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
The Advanced window
Access: You access the Advanced window by clicking the Advanced... button in the I/O Setup
window.
Advanced Window's Fields
The Advanced window contains the following fields:
Field
Description
Ftp Server
Port
Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information
from the device to the surveillance system via FTP. Default port is
port 21.
Alert Port
Lets you specify port number to use for handling event-based alerts,
including generic events. Default port is port 1234.
SMTP Port
Lets you specify port number to use for sending event information
from the device to the surveillance system via SMTP. Default port is
port 25.
Polling
Frequency
[1/10 sec]
For a small number of devices, primarily I/O devices (see Using
Dedicated I/O Devices), it is necessary for the surveillance system to
regularly check the state of the devices' input ports in order to
detect whether input has been received.
Such state checking at regular intervals is called polling. The Polling
Frequency field lets you specify the interval between state checks.
Interval is specified in tenths of a second. Default value is 10 tenths
of a second (i.e. one second).
For I/O devices it is highly recommended that the polling frequency
is set to the lowest possible value (one tenth of a second between
state checks).
For information about which devices require polling, see the release
note.
117
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
New Timer Window
The New Timer window lets you specify the settings for timer events. Timer events are separate
events, triggered by the input event, VMD event, generic event or event button under which they are
defined.
Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes after the event under which they are
defined has occurred or the event button under which they have been defined has been clicked.
Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes; the following are examples only:
•
A camera starts recording based on an input event, e.g. when a door is opened; a timer event
stops the recording after 15 seconds
•
Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event, i.e. when motion
is detected; a timer event stops the recording after one minute, and another timer event
switches the lights off after two minutes
The New Timer window
Access: You are able to access the New Timer window in three ways:
If dealing with input and VMD events in the I/O Setup window: When you click the plus sign ( ) next
to a device in the window's Defined events list, and select a defined event, you are able to click the
Add new event... button to access the New Timer window.
If dealing with event buttons in the Event Buttons window: When selecting an already specified event
button in the Defined Events list, you are able to click the Add new event... button to access the New
Timer window.
If dealing with TCP- and/or UDP-based events in the Generic Events window: When selecting an
already specified event in the Defined Events list, you are able to click the Add new event... button to
access the New Timer window.
New Timer Window's Fields
The New Timer window contains the following fields:
Field
Description
Timer event
is started by
Read-only field, displaying the name of the event or event button
under which the timer event is defined.
Timer event
name
Lets you specify a name for the timer event.
Note: Event names must not contain the following characters: < >
&'"\/:*?|[]
118
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Note: Some camera devices only support event names of a certain
length and/or with a certain structure. Refer to the camera's
documentation for exact details.
Timer event
occurs after
Lets you specify the amount of time that should pass between the
event occurring/event button being clicked and the timer event.
Specify the required amount of time in either seconds or minutes.
Examples:
•
The timer event should occur 15 seconds after the event
under which it is defined has occurred
•
The timer event should occur 2 minutes after the event
button under which it has been defined has been clicked
Event Buttons (Manual Triggering)
Event buttons lets users manually trigger events from NetGuard-EVS. In NetGuard-EVS, event buttons
are actually not buttons; instead users manually trigger events by selecting them from a list.
You are able to configure event buttons to suit the exact needs of your organization. Your main entry
point for configuring event buttons is the Administrator window: Clicking the Administrator window's
Event Buttons... button will open the Event Buttons window, in which you specify each individual event
button.
Event buttons can be used for a wide variety of purposes, for example:
•
As start and stop events for use in the Camera/Alert Scheduler window. For example, you can
make a camera start or stop transferring video to the surveillance system when an event
button is selected.
•
As start and stop events for use in the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name]
window. For example, you can make a camera use a higher frame rate when an event button
is selected, or you can use an event button for manually triggering PTZ preset positions on
event.
•
For triggering outputs. Particular outputs can be associated with the clicking of an event
button; you do this in the I/O Control window.
•
For triggering event-based e-mail and/or SMS alerts.
•
In combinations. For example, the clicking of an event button could make a camera start
transferring video to the surveillance system while two outputs are triggered and an e-mail
alert is sent to relevant people.
Event Buttons Window
Event buttons can be global (available for all cameras) or tied to a particular camera (only available
when the camera in question is selected).
The Event Buttons window lets you specify event buttons. When specified, event buttons become
available in NetGuard-EVS (in NetGuard-EVS, event buttons are actually not buttons; instead users
manually trigger events by selecting them from a list). Event buttons can be global (available for all
cameras) or tied to a particular camera (only available when the camera is selected).
119
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Access: You access the Event Buttons window by clicking the Event Buttons... button in the
Administrator window.
Defined Events List
The Event Buttons window features a list of specified event buttons. When event buttons have been
defined, you are able to expand elements in the list (by clicking ) to get an overview of all defined
event buttons; global event buttons as well as event buttons specified for individual cameras.
Example:
Expanded Defined Event list: A global
event button with an associated timer
event has been specified.
Also, two event buttons have been
specified for an individual camera.
Specifying Event Buttons and Timer Events
To specify an event button, first determine whether you want the event button to be available globally
or for a particular camera only.
Specifying Global Event Buttons
To specify a global event button, select the Global entry at the top of the Defined Events list,
then click the Add new event... button.
This will open the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons), in which you specify a
name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e-mail or
SMS alerts when clicked.
When you click OK in the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons), your are
returned to the Event Buttons window, in which your new event button will appear in the
Defined Events list.
120
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Specifying Camera-Specific Event Buttons
To specify an event button for a specific camera, select the required camera in the Defined
Events list, then click the Add new event... button.
This will open the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons), in which you specify a
name for the event button as well as whether the event button should trigger any e-mail or
SMS alerts when clicked.
When you click OK in the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons), you are returned
to the Events window (for specifying event buttons), in which your new event button will
appear in the Defined Events list.
Specifying Timer Events
When you have specified an event button, you are able to associate timer events with the
event button.
Timer events are separate events, occurring a specified number of seconds or minutes after
the event button has been clicked. Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes;
the following are examples only:
•
A camera starts when an event button is selected in NetGuard-EVS; a timer event
stops the camera after 15 seconds
•
A camera starts and the lights are switched on when an event button is selected in
NetGuard-EVS; a timer event stops the camera after one minute, and another timer
event switches the lights off after two minutes
To define a timer event for an event button, select the required event button in he Defined
Events list, then click the Add new event... button.
When you click the Add new event... button while an already specified event button is selected
in the Defined Events list, the New Timer window opens, allowing you to specify the required
timer event.
Tip: You may specify several timer events under a single event button. However, you
cannot use a timer event under another timer event.
Editing Event Buttons and Timer Events
To edit an event button, or a timer event specified under an event button, select the required event
button or timer event in the Defined Events list, then click the Edit selected... button.
If you have selected an event button, clicking the Edit selected... button will open the Edit Event
window (for editing event buttons).
If you have selected a timer event, clicking the Edit selected... button will open the New Timer
window.
121
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Associating Event Buttons with External Outputs
As is the case with input events (see External Input & Output), you are able to associate an event
button with specific external outputs. This way, external output, for example the sounding of a siren,
can be triggered automatically when an event button is clicked.
Like with input, VMD and generic events, the association between event buttons and outputs is made
in the I/O Control window.
Add New Event Window
The Add New Event window (for adding event buttons) lets you specify the settings for an event
button.
Access: You access the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons) from the Event Buttons
window: Select an entry (either global or for a specific camera) in the Defined Events list, then click
the Add new event... button.
Add New Event Window's Fields
The Add New Event window (for adding event buttons) contains the following fields:
Field
Description
Button
related to
Read-only field, displaying the name of the camera for which the
event will be specified.
If the field displays Global, the event button will be a global event
button (available for all cameras).
Manual
event name
Lets you specify a name for the event button.
Send e-mail
if this event
occurs
Select check box to send an e-mail alert when the event button is
clicked.
Include
image from
Available only if the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box is
selected.
Note: Event button names must not contain the following
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
122
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
camera
Send SMS if
this event
occurs
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Select check box to include an image, recorded at the time the event
button is clicked, in the e-mail alert, then select the required camera
in the list below the check box.
Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is
clicked.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
Edit Event Window
The Edit Event window (for editing event buttons) lets you edit the settings for an existing event
button.
Access: You access the Edit Event window (for editing event buttons) from the Event Buttons
window, by first selecting the required event button in the Defined Events list, then clicking the Edit
selected... button.
Edit Event Window's Fields
The Edit Event window (for editing event buttons) contains the following fields:
Field
Description
Button
related to
Read-only field, displaying the name of the camera for which the
event button has been specified.
If the field displays Global, the event button is a global event button
(available for all cameras).
Manual
event name
Lets you edit the name of the event button.
Send e-mail
if this event
occurs
Select check box to send an e-mail alert when the event button is
clicked.
Note: Event button names must not contain the following
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
123
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
Include
image from
camera
Available only if the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box is
selected.
Select check box to include an image, recorded at the time the event
button is clicked, in the e-mail alert, then select the required camera
in the list below the check box.
Send SMS if
this event
occurs
Select check box to send an SMS alert when the event button is
clicked.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
Generic Events
NetDVMS is able to analyze received TCP and/or UDP data packages, and automatically trigger an
event when specified criteria are met. This way you are able to easily integrate your NetDVMS
surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources, for example access control systems,
alarm systems, etc.
Events based on the analysis of received TCP and/or UDP packets are called generic events. NetDVMS
listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window (default is port
1234).
The Generic Events window lets you manage such events.
Access: You access the Generic Events window by clicking the Generic Events button in the
Administrator window.
124
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Generic Events Window's Events List and Buttons
The Generic Events window features a Defined events list, in which defined TCP- and/or UDP-based
events are listed, as well a number of buttons used when configuring the events:
Button
Description
Add new
event...
Lets you define new events.
The type of event you are able to define is determined by what you
have selected in the Defined events list:
•
When nothing is selected, or you have selected the list's
Generic item, clicking the Add new event... button will open
the Add New Event window (for specifying generic events),
in which you are able to specify the rules and notification
settings for individual TCP- and/or UDP-based events.
•
When an existing event is selected in the list, clicking the
Add new event... button will open the New Timer window, in
which you are able to specify timer events. Timer events are
separate events, triggered by the event under which they
are defined. Timer events occur a specified number of
seconds or minutes after the event under which they are
defined has occurred.
Edit
selected...
Opens the Edit Event window (for editing generic events), in which
you are able to edit the settings for an existing event selected in the
Defined events list.
Remove
selected
Lets you remove an existing event selected in the Defined events
list.
Note: The selected event will be removed without further warning.
125
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Add New Event
The Add New Event window (for specifying generic events) lets you specify the settings for an event
based on input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols: You are able to specify the
criteria according to which NetDVMS should analyze received TCP and/or UDP data packages, and
whether any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs.
Tip: TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters, such as @, #,
+, å, ~, etc. within the text string to be analyzed.
The Add New Event window (for
specifying generic events)
Access: You access the Add New Event window (for specifying generic events) from the Generic
Events window, by clicking the Add new event... button.
The Add New Event window (for specifying generic events) is divided into three sections:
General Event Settings Section
The Add New Event window (for specifying generic events) contains the following fields in the General
Event settings section:
Field
Description
Event Name
Lets you specify a name for the event.
Each event must have a unique name.
Note: Event names must not contain the following characters: < >
&'"\/:*?|[]
Event
Protocol
Lets you select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for in order to
detect the event:
•
Any: Listen for, and analyze, packages using TCP as well as
UDP protocol.
•
TCP: Listen for, and analyze, packages using TCP protocol
only.
126
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
•
UDP: Listen for, and analyze, packages using UDP protocol
only.
Which port is used? NetDVMS listens for generic events on the
port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window (default is port
1234).
Event rule
type
Lets you select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing
received data packages:
•
Match: In order for the event to occur, the received
package must contain exactly the message specified in the
Event rule string section's Event message include field, and
nothing else.
•
Search: In order for the event to occur, the received
package must contain the message specified in the Event
rule string section's Event message include field, but may
also have more content.
Example: If you have specified that the received package
should contain the terms ”User001” and ”Door053”, the
event will be triggered if the received package contains the
terms ”User001” and ”Door053” and ”Sunday” as your
required terms are contained in the received package.
Event
priority
The same data package may be analyzed for different events. The
ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which
event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria
for several events.
The priority must be specified as a number between 0 (lowest
priority) and 1000 (highest priority).
When NetDVMS receives a TCP and/or UDP package, analysis of the
packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority.
This way, when a package matches the criteria for several events,
only the event with the highest priority will be triggered.
In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an
identical priority, e.g. two events with a priority of 999, all events
with the priority in question will be triggered.
127
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Event Rule String Section
The Add New Event window (for specifying generic events) contains the following fields and buttons in
the Event rule string section:
Field, Button
Description
Event
substring
Lets you specify the individual items for which NetDVMS should look
out when analyzing data packages.
Specify one or more terms, then click the Add button to add the
specified term(s) to the Event message include field, the content of
which will be used for the actual analysis.
Examples:
•
Single term: User001 (when added to the Event message
include field, the term will appear as ”User001”)
•
Several terms as one item: User001 Door053 Sunday
(when added to the Event message include field, the terms
will appear as ”User001 Door053 Sunday”)
When you add several terms as one item (appearing as e.g.
”User001 Door053 Sunday” in the Event message include field),
everything between the quotation marks must appear together in
the package, in the specified sequence, in order to match your
criterion.
If the terms must appear in the package, but not necessarily in any
exact sequence, add the terms one by one (i.e. so they will appear
as ”User001” ”Door053” ”Sunday” in the Event message include
field).
Event
message
include
Displays the string which will be used for the actual package
analysis.
The field is not directly editable.
However, you are able to position the cursor inside the field in
order to determine where a new item should be included when you
click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons.
Likewise, you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order
to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the
Remove button: The item immediately to the left of the cursor will
be removed when you click the Remove button.
Add
Adds the content of the Event substring field to the Event message
include field, the content of which will be used for the actual
analysis.
See also the description of the Event substring and Event message
128
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field, Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
includes fields.
(
Lets you add a start parenthesis character to the Event message
include field.
Parentheses can be used to ensure that related terms are
processed together as a logical unit; in other words, they can be
used to force a certain processing order in the analysis.
Example: ( ”User001” OR ”Door053” ) AND ”Sunday”
In the example, the two terms inside the parenthesis will be
processed first, then the result will be combined with the last part
of the string.
In other words, the system will first look for any packages
containing either of the terms User001 or Door053, then it will take
the results and run through them in order to see which packages
also contain the term Sunday.
)
Lets you add an end parenthesis character to the Event message
include field.
AND
Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message include field.
With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of
the AND operator must be present.
Example: User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday
In the above example, the term User001 as well as the term
Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for
the criterion to be met. It is not enough for only one or two of the
terms to be present.
As a rule of thumb, the more terms you combine with AND, the
fewer results you will retrieve:
129
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field, Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
Example: Few results match the criterion
User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday
OR
Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field.
With an OR operator, you specify that either one or another term
must be present.
Example: User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday
In the above example, the term User001 or the term Door053 or
the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be
met. The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is
present.
As a rule of thumb, the more terms you combine with OR, the more
results you will retrieve:
Example: Many results match the criterion
User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday
Remove
Lets you remove the item immediately to the left of a cursor
positioned in the Event message include field.
If no cursor has been positioned in the Event message include field,
the last item in the field will be removed.
Notification Settings Section
The Add New Event window (for specifying generic events) contains the following fields in the
Notification settings section:
Field
Description
Send Email
if this event
occurs
Select check box to send an e-mail alert when the event occurs.
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
130
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
Include
image from
camera
Available only if the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box is
selected.
Send SMS if
this event
occurs
Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs.
Select check box to include an image, recorded at the time the
event is triggered, in the e-mail alert, then select the required
camera in the list below the check box.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
When you have specified a new generic event, click OK.
Edit Event Window
The Edit Event window (for editing generic events) lets you edit the settings for an event based on
input from external sources using the TCP and UDP protocols: You are able to edit the criteria
according to which NetDVMS should analyze received TCP and/or UDP data packages, and whether
any notifications should be triggered when the event occurs.
Tip: TCP and UDP packages used for generic events may contain special characters, such as @, #,
+, å, ~, etc. within the text string to be analyzed.
The Edit Event window (for
editing generic events)
Access: You access the Edit Event window (for specifying generic events) from the Generic Events
window, by selecting an event from the list, then clicking the Edit selected... button.
The Edit Event window (for editing generic events) is divided into three sections:
131
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
General Event Settings Section
The Edit Event window (for editing generic events) contains the following fields in the General Event
settings section:
Field
Description
Event Name
Lest you edit the name of the event.
Each event must have a unique name.
Note: Event names must not contain the following characters: < >
&'"\/:*?|[]
Event
Protocol
Lets you select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for in order to
detect the event:
•
Any: Listen for packages using TCP as well as UDP protocol.
•
TCP: Listen for packages using TCP protocol only.
•
UDP: Listen for packages using UDP protocol only.
Which port is used? NetDVMS listens for generic events on the
port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window (default is port
1234).
Event rule
type
Lets you select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing
received data packages:
•
Match: In order for the event to occur, the received
package must contain exactly the message specified in the
Event rule string section's Event message include field, and
nothing else.
•
Search: In order for the event to occur, the received
package must contain the message specified in the Event
rule string section's Event message include field, but may
also have more content.
Example: If you have specified that the event message
should contain the terms ”User001” and ”Door053”, the
event will be triggered if the message includes the terms
”User001” and ”Door053” and ”Sunday”.
Event
priority
The same data package may be analyzed for different events. The
ability to assign a priority to each event lets you manage which
event should be triggered if a received package matches the criteria
for several events.
The priority must be specified as a number between 0 (lowest
priority) and 1000 (highest priority).
132
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
When NetDVMS receives a TCP and/or UDP package, analysis of the
packet will start with analysis for the event with the highest priority.
This way, when a package matches the criteria for several events,
only the event with the highest priority will be triggered.
In case a package matches the criteria for several events with an
identical priority, e.g. two events with a priority of 999, all events
with the priority in question will be triggered.
Event Rule String Section
The Edit Event window (for editing generic events) contains the following fields and buttons in the
Event rule string section:
Field,
Button
Description
Event
substring
Lets you specify the individual items that NetDVMS should look out
for when analyzing data packages.
Specify one or more terms, then click the Add button to add the
specified term(s) to the Event message include field, the content of
which will be used for the actual analysis.
Examples:
•
Single term: User001 (when added to the Event message
include field, the term will appear as ”User001”)
•
Several terms as one item: User001 Door053 Sunday
(when added to the Event message include field, the terms
will appear as ”User001 Door053 Sunday”)
When you add several terms as one item (appearing as e.g.
”User001 Door053 Sunday” in the Event message include field),
everything between the quotation marks must appear together in
the package, in the specified sequence.
If the terms must appear in the package, but not necessarily in any
exact sequence, add the terms one by one (i.e. so they will appear
as ”User001” ”Door053” ”Sunday” in the Event message include
field).
Event
message
include
Displays the string which will be used for the actual package
analysis.
The field is not as such editable.
133
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field,
Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
However, you are able to position the cursor inside the field in
order to determine where a new item should be included when you
click the Add button or one of the parenthesis or operator buttons.
Likewise, you are able to position the cursor inside the field in order
to determine where an item should be removed when clicking the
Remove button: The item immediately to the left of the cursor will
be removed when you click the Remove button.
Add
Adds the content of the Event substring field to the Event message
include field.
See also the description of the Event substring and Event message
includes fields.
(
Lets you add a start parenthesis to the Event message include field.
Parentheses can be used to ensure that semantically related terms
are processed together as a logical unit; in other words, they can
be used to force a certain processing order in the analysis.
Example: ( "User001" OR "Door053" ) AND "Sunday"
In the example, the two OR terms will be processed first, then the
result will be combined with the last part of the string.
In other words, the system will first look for any packages
containing either of the terms User001 or Door053, then it will take
the results and run through them in order to see which packages
also contain the term Sunday.
)
Lets you add an end parenthesis to the Event message include
field.
AND
Lets you add an AND operator to the Event message include field.
With an AND operator you specify that the terms on both sides of
the AND operator must be present.
Example: User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday
In the above example, the term User001 as well as the term
Door053 as well as the term Sunday must be present in order for
the criterion to be met. It is not enough for only one or two of the
terms to be present.
As a rule of thumb, the more terms you combine with AND, the
fewer results you will retrieve:
134
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field,
Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
Example: Few results match the criterion
User001 AND Door053 AND Sunday.
OR
Lets you add an OR operator to the Event message include field.
With an OR operator, you specify that either one or another term
must be present.
Example: User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday
In the above example, the term User001 or the term Door053 or
the term Sunday must be present in order for the criterion to be
met. The criterion is satisfied even if only one of the terms is
present.
As a rule of thumb, the more terms you combine with OR, the more
results you will retrieve:
Example: Many results match the criterion
User001 OR Door053 OR Sunday.
Remove
Lets you remove the item immediately to the left of a cursor
positioned in the Event message include field.
If no cursor has been positioned in the Event message include field,
135
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field,
Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
the last item in the field will be removed.
Notification Settings Section
The Edit Event window (for editing generic events) contains the following fields in the Notification
settings section:
Field
Description
Send Email
if this
event
occurs
Select check box to send an e-mail alert when the event occurs.
Include
image from
camera
Available only if the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box is
selected.
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
Select check box to include an image, recorded at the time the
event is triggered, in the e-mail alert, then select the required
camera in the list below the check box.
Send SMS if
this event
occurs
Select check box to send an SMS alert when the input occurs.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
When you have edited the generic event, click OK.
136
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
I/O Control
In the I/O Control window you are able associate particular events and event buttons with one or
more particular outputs. This way you are able to define that when a selected event occurs, or when a
particular event button is clicked, one or more selected outputs will be triggered.
Note: Use of features in the I/O Control window requires that events and outputs have been specified
(see About Input, Events & Output ...).
The I/O Control window
Access: You access the I/O Control window from the Administrator window, by clicking the I/O
Control... button.
Associating Events with Particular Outputs
When associating an event with one or more outputs, you are able to select between all outputs
defined on the NetDVMS system; you are not limited to selecting outputs defined on a particular
device.
To associate a particular event with a particular output, do the following:
•
Select the required event in the Available Events list in the left side of the I/O Control window.
Tip: Events as well as event buttons may be listed.
Tip: When you select an event or event button in the Available Events list, you can view
detailed information about the selected event or event button under Event Information in the
lower part of the window.
•
Select the required output in the list of available outputs (the list in the middle of the window).
•
Click the >> button located below the Selected Outputs list.
This will copy the selected output to the Selected Outputs list. When the selected event occurs,
or when the selected event button is clicked, the selected output will be triggered.
You are able to associate an event or an event button with more than one output: Simply repeat the
process for each required output.
To remove an output from the Selected Outputs list, simply select the required output, and click the
<< button located below the Selected Outputs list.
137
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Output Settings for [Device Name][Camera Name] Window
In the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window you are able to associate a camera
with particular external outputs, defined in the I/O Setup window, for example the sounding of a siren
or the switching on of lights.
The associated outputs can be triggered automatically when motion is detected as well as manually
through output buttons available in NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS.
Access: You access the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window from the
Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, by clicking the Outputs... button.
Associating Outputs with Manual Control and Detected
Motion
Note: Use of features in the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window requires that
output has been defined in the I/O Setup window.
You have a high degree of flexibility when associating a camera with particular outputs:
•
You are able to select between all available outputs, i.e. outputs defined as output events for
the camera itself as well as outputs defined as output events for other devices on the
NetDVMS system
•
The same output may be used for manual control as well as for automatic triggering when
motion is detected
Selecting Output for Manual Control
You are able to specify outputs to be triggered manually from a list in NetGuard, Ocularis Client
Lite or NetGuard-EVS.
To specify an output for manual triggering in an OnSSI client, do the following:
1. Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for
[Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
Tip: When you select an output in the All Outputs list, you can view detailed
information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the
window.
138
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
2. Click the >> button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list.
This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list.
An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way.
You are able to determine each output’s position in NetGuard’s and NetGuard-EVS’s output list by
moving the selected output up or down in the On Manual Control list with the up and down
buttons located to the right of the list. The selected output is moved up one step each time you
click the up button. Likewise, each time you click the down button, the selected output is moved
down one step.
To remove an output from the On Manual Control list, simply select the required output, and click
the << button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list.
Selecting Output for Use on Motion Detection
You are able to select outputs to be triggered automatically when motion is detected in video from
the camera.
Tip: This feature does not require that a VMD (Video Motion Detection) event has been defined
for the camera in the I/O Setup window.
To select an output for use when motion is detected in video from the camera:
1. Select the required output in the All Outputs list in the left side of the Output Settings for
[Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
Tip: When you select an output in the All Outputs list, you can view detailed
information about the selected output under Output Information in the lower part of the
window.
2. Click the >> button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list.
This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list.
To remove an output from the On Motion Detected list, simply select the required output, and
click the << button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list.
Tip: See also About Input, Events & Output ...
139
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
How to ...
How to Add an Input-based Event
Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS, such as starting or stopping
recording on cameras, triggering e-mail or SMS notifications, making PTZ cameras move to specific
preset positions, activating output, etc.
Several types of events exist (see About Input, Events & Output ...). In the following you will see how
to define events based on input received from external input units—such as sensors attached to doors,
windows, etc.—connected to cameras or other devices on a NetDVMS system.
To add an input-based event, do the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, click the I/O Setup button.
This will open the I/O Setup window.
2.
In the I/O Setup window, first select the camera or other device to which the input unit is
connected, then click the Add new event... button:
This will open the Add New Event window.
Note: Some cameras/devices are capable of handling one input event only; others are
capable of handling several input events. The content of the Add New Event window varies
accordingly. For simplicity reasons, the following steps will describe adding an event on a
camera/device capable of handling one input event only.
3.
In the Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling one input event only), the
External sensor connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device.
140
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Sensor connected through: Select the camera/device input port on which the input
unit is connected. Some cameras/devices only have a single input port; in that case
simply select Input 1.
•
Event occurs when input goes: Select whether the input event should be triggered
when the signal on the input sensor rises (High) or falls (Low).
•
External event name: Specify a name for the event. Note that event names must not
contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
•
(Optional) If requiring an e-mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs,
select the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box. Note that in order to be able to
use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup
window. If requiring an image (recorded at the time of the event) to be included in
the e-mail alert, also check the Include image from camera check box and select the
required camera in the list next to the check box.
•
(Optional) If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent
automatically when the event occurs, select the Send SMS if this event occurs check
box. Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature must have
been set up in the SMS settings window.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the I/O Setup window.
4.
In the I/O Setup window, your newly defined event is now listed (you may have to click the
expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing):
Click OK to close the I/O setup window and return to the Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the event will now be
selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
141
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
How to Add an Event Button
Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS, such as starting or stopping
recording on cameras, triggering e-mail or SMS notifications, making PTZ cameras move to specific
preset positions, activating output, etc. An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously.
Several types of events exist (see About Input, Events & Output ...). In most cases, events occur and
actions are triggered without the need for human intervention by NetDVMS users: System
administrators define the criteria for each event, for example a certain amount of detected motion or
input from a specific sensor; when the criteria are met, the system interprets it as an event, and
automatically triggers the required actions.
However, you may also want users to be able to manually force an event to occur. For this purpose,
NetDVMS lets you define event buttons. Event buttons let users manually trigger events from
NetGuard-EVS. In NetGuard-EVS, event buttons are actually not buttons; instead users manually
trigger events by selecting them from a list. See also About Event Buttons for examples of the many
ways in which you can use event buttons.
To add an event button, do the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, click the Event Buttons... button.
This will open the Event Buttons window.
2.
In the Event Buttons window, first select the camera or other device for which you want the
event button to be available, then click the Add new event... button.
Note that you are also able to make the event button globally available (i.e. available to users
regardless of which camera/device they have selected in NetGuard-EVS. To make the event
button globally available, simply select Global (at the top of the list) instead of a particular
camera/device.
This will open the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons).
3.
In the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons), the Button related to field will show
the name of the selected camera or other device. If you are adding a globally available event
button, the field will display Global.
142
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Manual event name: Specify a name for the event button. Note that event names
must not contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
•
(Optional) If requiring an e-mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs,
select the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box. Note that in order to be able to
use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup
window. If requiring an image (recorded at the time of the event) to be included in
the e-mail alert, also check the Include image from camera check box and select the
required camera in the list next to the check box.
•
(Optional) If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent
automatically when the event occurs, select the Send SMS if this event occurs check
box. Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature must have
been set up in the SMS settings window.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the Event buttons window.
4.
In the Event Buttons window, your newly defined event button is now listed (you may have to
click the expand icon in front of the name of camera or other device to see the listing):
Click OK to close the Event Buttons window and return to the Administrator window.
The defined event button will now be available in the NetGuard-EVS, as described in the
beginning of this text. Note that individual users' rights may them from accessing specific
cameras and/or events in NetGuard-EVS; such rights are defined through the Image Server
Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the event button will
now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
143
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
How to Add a VMD Event
Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS, such as starting or stopping
recording on cameras, triggering e-mail or SMS notifications, making PTZ cameras move to specific
preset positions, activating output, etc. An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously.
Tip: If you are specifically looking for information about how to configure motion detectiontriggered activation of an output device only (such as a siren, a strobe light, etc.), see How to Add a
Motion-Triggered Output.
Several types of events exist (see About Input, Events & Output ...). In the following, you will see how
to define an event based on NetDVMS detecting motion on a particular camera (VMD simply means
Video Motion Detection). Once the VMD event is defined, you will be able to select it when further
configuring NetDVMS.
Note: In addition to NetDVMS's motion detection, some devices also have their own capabilities for
detecting motion (configured in the devices' own software; typically by accessing a browser-based
configuration interface on the device's IP address). Events based on motion detected on a device itself
are not VMD Events; they are input events, since they are based on input from the device.
Note: Your motion detection settings for the camera in question will entirely determine when motion
is detected, and thus when the VMD event will occur. See the description of the Adjust Motion
Detection window for more information. Also note that in order not to generate an excessively high
number of VMD events during periods with lots of motion, a VMD event cannot occur more frequently
than every five seconds.
To add a VMD event, do the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, click the I/O Setup button.
This will open the I/O Setup window.
2.
In the I/O Setup window, first select the device on which motion must be detected in order for
the event to occur, then click the Add VMD Event (Motion Detection) button:
This will automatically add a VMD event to the selected device (unless the selected device is a
video encoder, see below).
o
If the selected device is a video encoder, several cameras may be attached to the
device, and a separate dialog will prompt you to select the required camera:
144
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
When ready, click OK.
3.
In the I/O Setup window, your newly defined VMD event will now be listed (you may have to
click the expand icon in front of the name of the device to see the listing):
Click OK to close the I/O Setup window and return to the Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the VMD event will now
be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
Tip: For video encoder devices, you are able to define a VMD event for each connected
camera; simply repeat above process.
How to Add a Generic Event
NetDVMS is able to analyze received TCP and/or UDP data packages, and automatically trigger an
event when specified criteria are met. This way you are able to easily integrate your NetDVMS
surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources, for example access control systems,
alarm systems, etc.
Events based on the analysis of received TCP and/or UDP packets are called generic events. NetDVMS
listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window (default is port
1234).
To add a generic event, do the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, click the Generic Events... button.
This will open the Generic Events window.
2.
In the Generic Events window, first select the Generic item, then click the Add new event...
button:
145
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
This will open the Add New Event window (for specifying generic events).
3.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
•
Event name: Specify a name for the event. Note that event names must not contain
the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Event Protocol: Select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for: Any (i.e. TCP as
well as UDP), TCP only, or UDP only.
Which port is used? NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as
Alert Port in the Advanced window (default is port 1234).
•
Event rule type: Select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received
data packages: Match if the received package must contain only the exact message
specified in the Event message include field (see description in the following), Search
if the received package must contain the message specified in the Event message
include field, but may also have other content.
•
Event priority: Specify a priority between 0 (lowest priority) and 1000 (highest
priority) for the event, in case a received data package matches more than one
event.
•
Event rule string: Specify what NetDVMS should look out for when analyzing the
data packages, then click the Add button to add the specified term(s) to the Event
message include field, the content of which is used when analyzing received data
packages. You are furthermore able to use processing order parentheses and two
different Boolean operators in the Event message include field by clicking the buttons
146
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
to the right of the field.
•
(Optional) If requiring an e-mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs,
select the Send Email if this event occurs check box. Note that in order to be able to
use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup
window. If requiring an image (recorded at the time of the event) to be included in
the e-mail alert, also check the Include image from camera check box and select the
required camera in the list next to the check box.
•
(Optional) If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent
automatically when the event occurs, select the Send SMS if this event occurs check
box. Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature must have
been set up in the SMS settings window.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the Generic Events window.
4.
In the Generic Events window, your newly defined event is now listed (you may have to click
the expand icon in front of the Generic item to see the listing):
Click OK to close the Generic Event window and return to the Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the generic event will
now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
Tip: See also How to Test a Generic Event.
Once you have added a generic event (see How to Add a Generic Event), a quick and easy way to test
your generic event is to first set up an event notification and then use Telnet to send a small amount
of data which will trigger the generic event and in turn the event notification.
What is Telnet? Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP/IP networks. With Telnet,
you can connect to a server from a computer on the network, and execute commands through Telnet
as if you were entering them directly on the server. Windows includes a client for use with Telnet.
For this example, we have created a generic event called Video. Our generic event simply specifies
that if the term video appears in a received TCP data package, the generic event should be triggered.
Your generic event may be different, but you can still use the principles outlined in the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, first select a camera from which you are able to view video in a
NetGuard/NetGuard-EVS, then click the Settings button.
This will open the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
2.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click the Event
Notifications... button:
147
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
This will open the Setup Notifications on Events window.
3.
In the Setup Notifications on Events window's Available Events list, expand the Generic item
and select your generic event. Then click the >> button to move the selected generic event to
the Active Events list:
Note: Make sure that your generic event is the only event appearing in the Active Events list
while you are performing the test, otherwise you cannot be sure that it is your generic event
which triggers the event notification. Once you are done testing, you can move any
temporarily removed events back to the Active Events list.
4.
Click OK in the Setup Notifications on Events window, click OK in the Camera Settings for
[Device Name] [Camera Name] window, then click the Exit button in the Administrator
window.
5.
Make sure NetDVMS's recording server service. Also make sure that the camera for which you
configured the event notification is displayed in your NetGuard or NetGuard-EVS.
6.
In Windows' Start menu, select Run..., and type the following in the Open field:
•
If you are performing the test on the NetDVMS server itself:
148
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
telnet localhost 1234
•
If you are performing the test from a remote computer: Substitute localhost
with the IP address of the NetDVMS server. Example: If the IP address of the
NetDVMS server is 123.123.123.123, type:
telnet 123.123.123.123 1234
Note: In the above examples, the number 1234 indicates the port on which the NetDVMS
server listens for generic events. Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose, but it is
possible to change this by specifying another port number in the Advanced window's Alert
Port field. If the alert port number has been changed on your system, type your system's
alert port number instead of 1234.
This will open a Telnet window.
7.
In the Telnet window, type the term (so-called event substring) required to trigger your
generic event. In our case, the required term is video:
While typing in the Telnet window, you may experience so-called echo. This is simply the
server repeating some or all of the characters it receives; it will not have any impact as long
as you are sure you type the required characters.
8.
Close the Telnet window by clicking the close button in its top right corner:
9.
Go to your NetGuard or NetGuard-EVS. If the yellow event notification indicator lights up for
the required camera, your generic event works as intended.
How to Add a Timer Event
Timer events are separate events, triggered by the input event, VMD event, generic event or event
button under which they are defined. Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes
after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have
been defined has been clicked.
Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes; the following are examples only:
•
A camera starts recording based on an input event, e.g. when a door is opened; a timer event
stops the recording after 15 seconds
•
Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event, i.e. when motion
is detected; a timer event stops the recording after one minute, and another timer event
switches the lights off after two minutes
149
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
To define a timer event, do the following:
1.
2.
A timer event requires that an input event, VMD event, generic event or event button has
already been defined. Begin by selecting the required event or event button:
•
If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Input or VMD Event: Click
the Administrator window's I/O Setup... button to open the I/O Setup window: In the
I/O Setup window's Defined events list, click the plus sign ( ) next to the required
device, select the required input or VMD event, then click the Add new event... button
to open the New Timer window.
•
If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Event Button: Click the
Administrator window's Event Buttons... button to open the Event Buttons window: In
the Event Buttons window's Defined Events list, select the required event button, then
click the Add new event... button to open the New Timer window.
•
If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Generic Event: Click the
Administrator window's Generic Events... button to open the Generic Events window:
In the Generic Events window's Defined Events list, select the required generic event,
then click the Add new event... button to open the New Timer window.
In the New Timer window, the Timer event is started by field will show the name of the
selected event or event button.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Timer event name: Specify a name for the timer event. Note that event names must
not contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
•
Timer event occurs after: Specify the amount of time that should pass between the
event occurring/event button being clicked and the timer event, in either seconds or
minutes.
When ready, click OK.
3.
In the window from which you opened the New Timer window, your newly defined timer event
will now be listed:
150
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Timer event (in this example associated with a
VMD event) listed in I/O Setup window. You may
have to click the expand icon
in front of the
name of the required device as well as the
required main event to see the timer event.
Timer event (associated with an event button)
listed in Event Buttons window. You may have to
click the expand icon
in front of the name of
the required device as well as the required main
event to see the timer event.
Timer event (associated with a generic event)
listed in Generic Events window. You may have to
click the expand icon
in front of the word
Generic as well as the required main event to see
the timer event.
Click OK to return to the Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the timer event will now
be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
151
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
How to Add a Manually Controlled Output
Output (e.g. lights, sirens, etc.) connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered manually
when viewing live video in NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS.
•
In an OnSSI client, output may be triggered by selecting the required output from a list on the
client's Live tab.
The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the specific camera from which a
NetGuard/Ocularis Client Lite/NetGuard-EVS user views live video; the output can be connected to any
device on your NetDVMS system.
To add an output for manual control, do the following:
Note: In the following, it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output
port on the required camera or other device, but that it has not yet been defined on your NetDVMS
system. If you have already defined the output on your system, begin at step 5.
1.
In the Administrator window, click the I/O Setup button.
This will open the I/O Setup window.
2.
In the I/O Setup window, first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is
connected, then click the Add new output event... button:
This will open the Add New Output window.
3.
In the Add New Output window, the External output connected to field will show the name of
the selected camera or other device.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Output connected on: Select the camera/device output port on which the output
unit is connected. Many cameras/devices only have a single output port; in that case
simply select Output 1.
•
Keep output for: Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active
when triggered, in either 1/10 seconds or seconds.
Note: Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time, for
example max. five seconds. Refer to the documentation for the device in question for
exact information.
152
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
External output name: Specify a name for the output. The name will appear on the
button/list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output. Note that
output names must not contain the following characters: <> & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
In the following example, we have specified that a siren connected on a camera's Output 1
port should sound for five seconds when triggered:
Tip: You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the I/O Setup window.
4.
In the I/O Setup window, your newly defined output is now listed (you may have to click the
expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing):
Click OK to close the I/O setup window and return to the Administrator window.
5.
In the Administrator window, first select the camera for which the output should be available,
then click the Settings... button.
This will open the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
6.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click the Outputs...
button:
153
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
This will open the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
7.
In the All Outputs list in the window's left side, select the required output, then click the >>
button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list:
This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list, which lists all outputs
available for manual control when viewing live video from the camera in question.
Good to know:
•
You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself. If output has
been defined on other cameras/devices on the NetDVMS system, this output will also
be selectable in the All Outputs list.
•
An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way.
•
If you have specified several outputs in the On Manual Control list, you are able to
control the sequence in which the outputs will be displayed in the OnSSI client. By
using the up and down buttons located to the right of the list, you can change a
selected output's position in the sequence.
•
The Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window also lets you select
output for automatic triggering on detected motion. This is further described in How to
154
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Add a Motion-Triggered Output.
8.
When ready, click the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window's Exit
button to return to the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
9.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click OK to return to the
Administrator window.
10. Close the Administrator.
The defined output will now be available in the NetGuard/NetGuard-EVS, as described in the
beginning of this text.
Note that individual users' rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and/or
output in NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS; such rights are defined through the Image Server
Administrator window.
How to Add a Motion-Triggered Output
Output (e.g. lights, sirens, etc.) connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered automatically
when motion is detected by a camera. The output does not necessarily have to be physically
connected to the motion-detecting camera.
To add a motion-triggered output, do the following:
Note: The following describes one way of adding a motion-triggered output, namely through the
Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window. Alternatively, motion-triggered output
may be based on VMD events or—if a device has its own motion detection capabilities—on input
events. Once such VMD or input events have been added, they can be tied to output through the I/O
Control window.
Note: In the following, it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output
port on the required camera or other device, but that it has not yet been defined on your NetDVMS
system. If you have already defined the output on your system, begin at step 5.
1.
In the Administrator window, click the I/O Setup button.
This will open the I/O Setup window.
2.
In the I/O Setup window, first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is
connected, then click the Add new output event... button:
This will open the Add New Output window.
155
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
3.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
In the Add New Output window, the External output connected to field will show the name of
the selected camera or other device.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Output connected on: Select the camera/device output port on which the output
unit is connected. Many cameras/devices only have a single output port; in that case
simply select Output 1.
•
Keep output for: Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active
when triggered, in either 1/10 seconds or seconds.
Note: Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time, for
example max. five seconds. Refer to the documentation for the device in question for
exact information.
•
External output name: Specify a name for the output. The name will appear on the
button/list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output. Note that
output names must not contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
In the following example, we have specified that a siren connected on a camera's Output 1
port should sound for five seconds when triggered:
Tip: You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the I/O Setup window.
4.
In the I/O Setup window, your newly defined output is now listed (you may have to click the
expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing):
Click OK to close the I/O setup window and return to the Administrator window.
5.
In the Administrator window, first select the camera for which the output should be available,
then click the Settings... button.
156
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
This will open the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
6.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click the Outputs...
button:
This will open the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
7.
In the All Outputs list in the window's left side, select the required output, then click the >>
button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list:
This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list, which lists all outputs to be
automatically triggered when motion is detected by the camera..
Good to know:
•
You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself. If output has
been defined on other cameras/devices on the NetDVMS system, this output will also
be selectable in the All Outputs list.
•
An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way.
157
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
The Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window also lets you select
output for manual triggering in an OnSSI client. This is further described in How to
Add a Manually Controlled Output.
8.
When ready, click the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window's Exit
button to return to the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
9.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click OK to return to the
Administrator window.
10. Close the Administrator.
The defined output will now be triggered automatically when motion is detected by the
selected camera.
Note that the automatic output triggering will be controlled entirely by your motion detection
settings for the camera in question. See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window
for more information.
NetMatrix
NetMatrix allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera on any monitor on a network
operating with NetDVMS.
Access: You access the NetMatrix Configuration window by clicking the NetMatrix... button in the
Administrator window.
The NetMatrix Configuration window has two tabs; the Config tab lets you define individual computers
on which it should be possible to view NetMatrix-triggered content (such computers are known as
NetMatrix recipients), the Event tab lets you define which events should trigger which actions in
individual NetMatrix recipients:
Config Tab
The Config tab is used for enabling NetMatrix functionality and for defining which computers to display
NetMatrix-triggered live video on.
A computer on which NetMatrix-triggered video can be displayed is known as a NetMatrix recipient.
Being able to view NetMatrix-triggered video requires that either a NetGuard-EVS or the dedicated
NetMatrix Monitor software is installed on the user's computer.
Tip: See the minimum system requirements for using the NetMatrix Monitor software under System
Requirements.
The Config tab contains the following fields, check boxes and buttons:
Field, Check
Box, Button
Description
Enable
NetMatrix
Select check box to enable NetMatrix functionality.
158
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Field, Check
Box, Button
Description
[List of
Defined
NetMatrix
recipients]
Lists any already defined NetMatrix recipients, i.e. computers on
which NetMatrix-triggered video can be displayed.
To change the properties of an already defined NetMatrix recipient,
select the required NetMatrix recipient, make the changes in the
fields below the list, then click the Update button.
To remove a NetMatrix recipient from the list, select the unwanted
NetMatrix recipient, then click the Delete button. You will be
prompted to confirm the removal.
Delete
Available only when you have selected a NetMatrix recipient in the
list.
Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected NetMatrix
recipient. You will be prompted to confirm the removal.
Name
Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the
properties of an existing one.
Type a name for the NetMatrix recipient. The name will appear in
various day-to-day usage situations; it is therefore a good idea to
use a descriptive and unambiguous name.
Note: NetMatrix recipient names must not contain the following
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Address
Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the
properties of an existing one.
Specify the IP address of the NetMatrix recipient.
Tip: To jump to the next IP address segment in the field, press
SPACE on your keyboard.
Port
Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the
properties of an existing one.
Specify the port number to be used when sending commands to the
NetMatrix recipient. The NetMatrix recipient will listen for commands
on this port.
By default, port 12345 is used. You are of course able to specify
another port number.
Password
Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the
properties of an existing one.
159
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field, Check
Box, Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
Specify the password to be used when communicating with the
NetMatrix recipient.
NetGuardEVS
NetMatrix-triggered live video may also be displayed in NetDVMS
users' Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS. If Ocularis Client Lite or
NetGuard-EVS is used, distribution of the NetMatrix-triggered live
video takes place slightly differently.
Select check box if the NetMatrix recipient in question is using
Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS.
Clear
Removes any content in the Name, Address, Port, Password and
NetGuard-EVS fields.
Update
Available only if you have edited the properties of an existing
NetMatrix recipient.
Updates the properties of the selected NetMatrix recipient with the
changes made during editing.
Add
Available only if you have added properties of a new NetMatrix
recipient in the Name, Address, Port, Password, and possibly
NetGuard-EVS fields.
Adds the new NetMatrix recipient to the list.
Event Tab
There are two ways in which NetMatrix-triggered video can appear in a NetMatrix recipient:
•
Another user wants to share important video, and sends it to the required NetMatrix recipient
from a NetGuard-EVS, or from a custom-made web page
•
Video is sent to the required NetMatrix recipient automatically when a predefined event occurs
The Event tab is used for configuring the automatic sending of live video based on predefined events;
it lets you define exactly which events and cameras to use. You define this on a per-NetMatrix
recipient basis.
To define what should happen on which NetMatrix recipient when an event occurs, do the following:
1. Select the required NetMatrix recipient.
2. Right-click the NetMatrix recipient to select the required event:
160
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
In this example, the selected event is detected motion on a particular camera. Note that, if
available, you are also able to select other types of event, including input events, generic
events, VMD events, event buttons (including global event buttons) and timer events.
When you select an event, it will initially be highlighted by a red exclamation mark:
The exclamation mark indicates that there is additional configuration to be done.
3. Now right-click the event to select which action should take place when the event occurs:
You have three actions to choose from:
•
Connect: Connect to the camera (you will specify the actual camera in the next step)
•
Disconnect, then connect: Disconnect any existing connection to the camera (you will
specify the actual camera in the next step), then connect again.
This option is useful because NetMatrix recipients are often able to show live video from
more than one event, in which case the live video will appear in the NetMatrix recipient
on a first-in-first-out basis. Each time a new event occurs, video from the latest event is
displayed prominently in a specific position on the NetMatrix recipient, while at the
same time video from the older events is shifted to less prominent positions and
eventually ”pushed out” of the NetMatrix recipient in order to make space for the latest
event's video.
With the Connect option, you may thus experience that if video triggered by one event
on a camera is already shown on the NetMatrix recipient, videos triggered by another
event on the same camera would not be displayed prominently as coming from the
latest event – simply because the NetMatrix recipient is already showing video from the
camera in a less prominent position.
By selecting Disconnect, then connect you can avoid this issue, and ensure that video
from the latest event is always displayed prominently.
•
Disconnect: Disconnect the camera (you will specify the actual camera in the next
step). Use if a particular event should cause video from a particular camera to stop
being displayed in the NetMatrix recipient, even if they are not yet old enough to be
”pushed out” of the NetMatrix recipient.
When you have selected an action, another red exclamation mark will indicate that there is still
some configuration to be done:
161
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
4. Right-click the action to select which camera to apply the action on:
In this example, we have specified that when motion is detected on Camera b, the
selected NetMatrix recipient should connect to Camera b:
5. Repeat as required. Bear in mind that you define events and actions for a single NetMatrix
recipient at a time.
Monitor
If you have used previous versions of NetDVMS, you may note that the Monitor application for viewing
of live video on the surveillance system server itself has been discontinued as from NetDVMS version
6.5.
When you want to view live video, use NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite. Ocularis Client Lite and
NetGuard-EVS have features for viewing live video which are far superior to those previously available
in the Monitor application.
Tip: NetGuard-EVS is automatically installed on the surveillance system server as part of the
NetDVMS installation.
Tip: The Monitor application also included the so-called Viewer application for browsing recorded
video. The Viewer is still available, although we recommend NetGuard-EVS for browsing recorded
video. If you want to use the Viewer, access it from Windows' Start menu: Select Start > All Programs
> NetDVMS > Viewer.
Recording Server Service
Using the Recording Server Manager
The Recording Server service is a vital part of the surveillance system; video streams are only
transferred to NetDVMS while the Recording Server service is running.
The Recording Server Manager informs you about the state of the Recording Server service. It also
lets you manage the service.
162
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
The Recording Server Manager's notification area (a.k.a. system tray) icon indicates whether the
Recording Server service is running or not. Green indicates running (default), red indicates not
running.
By right-clicking the icon you can start and stop the Recording Server service, view log files, etc.
Starting the Recording Server Service
To start the Recording Server service, do the following:
•
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon.
•
In the menu that appears, select Start Recording Server Service.
•
The icon in the notification area changes to green.
Stop the Recording Server Service
To stop the Recording Server service, do the following:
•
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon.
•
In the menu that appears, select Stop Recording Server Service.
163
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
The icon in the notification area changes to red.
Opening the NetDVMS Application
To open the Administrator application, do the following:
•
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon.
•
In the menu that appears, select Open Administrator.
Monitoring System Status
By right-clicking the notification area's Recording Server icon and then selecting Show System Status,
you get access to the Status window.
Tip: Alternatively, simply double-click the icon to open the Status window.
The Status window lets you view the status of the image server(s) and connected cameras. The status
of each server/camera is indicated by a color:
•
Green indicates that the server or camera is running correctly.
•
Gray indicates that the camera (not the server) is not running. Typically, a camera will be
indicated by gray in the following situations:
o the camera has been set offline in the Camera Alert Scheduler window.
o the Recording Server service has been paused from the Service Manager window.
o the Recording Server service has been stopped.
•
Red indicates that the server or camera is not running. This may because it has been
unplugged or due to a network or hardware error. Errors are listed in the Recording Server log
file (see the following).
Place your mouse pointer over a camera in the status window to view detailed information
about the camera in question. The information updates approximately every 10 seconds.
164
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
•
Resolution: Shows the resolution of the camera.
•
FPS: Shows the number of frames per second (a.k.a. frame rate) currently used by
the camera. The number updates each time the camera has received 50 frames.
•
Frame count: Shows the number of frames received from the camera since the
Recording Server was last started.
•
Received KB: Shows the number of kilobytes sent the by camera since the Recording
Server was last started.
•
Offline: Indicates the number of times the camera has been offline due to an error.
Viewing the Recording Server Log File
To view the recording server log file, do the following:
1.
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon.
2.
In the menu that appears, select Open Recording Server Log File....
For more information about log files, see About Logging.
Viewing the Image Server Log File
To view the Image Server log file, do the following:
1.
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon.
2.
In the menu that appears, select Open Image Server Log File....
For more information about log files, see About Logging.
Accessing the Built-in Help System
To view the built-in help system, do the following:
1.
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon.
2.
In the menu that appears, select Help.
For more information, see Using the Built-in Help System.
Viewing Information about NetDVMS
To view information about your NetDVMS version, do the following:
1.
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon.
2.
In the menu that appears, select About...
Knowing the version number can be useful in case you require support from your vendor.
165
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Exiting the Recording Server Manager
To exit the Recording Server Manager, do the following:
1.
Right-click the notification area's Recording Server icon.
2.
In the menu that appears, select Exit Recording Server Manager.
Tip: To re-open the Recording Server Manager, go to Windows' Start menu and select All Programs
> Startup > NetDVMS Recording Server Manager.
The Service Manager window lets you pause/resume the Recording Server service. Pausing the service
is necessary in order to access some features, such as configuration of PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) cameras.
Access: You access the Service Manager window by clicking the Service Manager... button in the
Administrator window.
Pausing the Recording Server Service
To pause the Recording Server service, click the Pause button.
IMPORTANT: While the Recording Server service is paused, no video or audio will be available;
neither for live viewing, nor for recording.
Resuming the Recording Server Service
When the service is paused, the Service Manager window closes. The next time you open it, the Pause
button will have changed to Resume. Simply click the Resume button to resume the Recording Server
service:
Tip: The service is automatically resumed when you exit the Administrator application.
What to Do if the Recording Server Service is Stopped
If the Service Manager window informs you that the recording server is stopped, the Recording Server
service has been stopped (as opposed to paused) outside the Administrator application.
You are able to start a stopped Recording Server service through the Recording Server Manager.
166
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Scheduling
The Camera/Alert Scheduler window lets you specify when each camera should be online. A camera is
online when it is transferring video to the NetDVMS server for processing.
IMPORTANT: The fact that a camera is online (i.e. transferring video to the NetDVMS server) will not
necessarily mean that video from the camera is recorded (i.e. stored in the camera’s database on the
NetDVMS server). Image storage settings for individual cameras are specified in the Camera Settings
for [Device Name] [Camera Name] Window.
You are able to specify whether cameras should be online within specific periods of time, or whether
they should start and stop transferring video when specific events occur within specific periods of
time. You are also able to specify when the camera should speedup recording and if e-mail alerts or
SMS alerts should be triggered if motion is detected during specific periods of time. If using PTZ
cameras with patrolling, you are furthermore able to specify if certain patrol schemes should be used
during specific periods of time.
By default, cameras added to NetDVMS will automatically be online, and you will only need to modify
the Camera/Alert Scheduler window's settings if you require cameras to be online only at specific
times or events, or if you want to use specific alerts or PTZ patrol schemes. Note, however, that this
default may be changed by clearing the General Settings window's Create Default schedule for new
cameras check box: If the check box is cleared, subsequently added cameras will not automatically be
online, in which case online schedules must be specified manually.
Access: To access the Camera/Alert Scheduler window, click the Scheduler... button in the
Administrator window.
167
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Fields and Check Boxes
The Camera/Alert Scheduler Window features the following fields and check boxes:
Field, Check
Box
Description
Camera
Lets you select a particular camera, for which to specify or view a
schedule in the window's calendar section.
Note: Always verify that you have selected the required camera in
the list; even though schedules displayed in the calendar section
may look—and indeed sometimes be—similar, the displayed
schedule refers specifically to the selected camera.
Mode
Select whether to add or delete periods in the calendar section:
•
Set: Add periods. May also be used to overwrite existing
periods.
•
Clear: Delete existing periods.
Online
Check the Online box when you want to set or clear online periods
for the selected camera.
Speedup
Check the Speedup box when you want to set or clear when the
camera should always/never speedup recording.
Note: The Speedup check box is only available if you have enabled
speedup in the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name]
window.
E-mail
Check the E-mail box when you want to set or clear periods with
motion- or database-related e-mail alerts for the selected camera.
Such alerts can automatically be sent to one or more recipients
when motion or database events are detected.
Note: In order to be able to use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert
feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup window.
SMS
Check the SMS box when you want to set or clear periods with
motion- or database-related SMS (mobile phone text message)
alerts for the selected camera. Such alerts can automatically be sent
to one or more recipients when motion or database events are
detected.
Note: In order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature
must have been set up in the SMS settings window.
Patrolling
Check the Patrolling box when you want to set or clear periods with
patrolling for a selected PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom)camera.
168
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field, Check
Box
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Description
Note: The Patrolling box is only available if you have selected a PTZ
camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up.
Start event
When you set an Online period, you will be asked whether you want
the selected camera to transfer video to the NetDVMS software
continuously within the specified period (Always), or only when an
event occurs within the specified period (On Event).
If using On Event, the Start event list lets you select the required
start event.
Note: The use of event-based online periods requires that events
have been defined. Read more about events in About Input, Events
& Output ...
Stop event
When you set an Online period, you will be asked whether you want
the selected camera to transfer video to the NetDVMS software
continuously within the specified period (Always), or only when an
event occurs within the specified period (On Event).
If using On Event, the Stop event list lets you select the required
stop event.
Note: The use of event-based online periods requires that events
have been defined. Read more about events in About Input, Events
& Output ...
Patrol
scheme
When you set a Patrolling period for a PTZ camera with patrolling,
the Patrol scheme list lets you select the required patrol scheme.
Note: The Patrol scheme list is only available if you have selected a
PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up.
169
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Calendar Section
The Camera/Alert Scheduler window's calendar section lets you specify exact periods of time for each
option for each camera selected in the window's Camera list.
Set and Clear Modes
Depending on your selection in the Mode list, you Set or Clear periods in the calendar. Your
selection is indicated by your mouse pointer turning into either a pencil (Set) or an eraser (Clear)
when inside the calendar section.
Mouse pointer turns into pencil (Set) or
eraser (Clear) when inside calendar section
Zoom Feature
When placing your mouse pointer inside the day band in the top part of the calendar section you
get access to the calendar's zoom feature.
With the zoom feature you are able to toggle between the calendar's default seven-day view and
a single-day view.
The single-day view provides you with five-minute interval indications, allowing you to specify
periods precisely.
Calendar's zoom feature allows you to toggle between seven-day and single-day views
How to Set or Clear Periods in the Calendar
To set or clear a period in the Camera/Alert Scheduler window's calendar section, simply click at the
required start point in the calendar, and drag to set/clear a period (depending on whether you have
selected Set or Clear in the window's Mode list).
Good to Know when You Set Online Periods
When you set an Online period, you will be asked whether you want the selected camera to
transfer video to the NetDVMS software continuously within the specified period (Always), or only
when an event occurs within the specified period (On Event).
The Online Method window used
for specifying at which occasion
the camera should be online
170
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
If using On Event, remember to select required start and stop events in the Start event and Stop
event lists.
Good to Know when You Set Patrolling Periods
Select the required patrol scheme from the Patrol scheme list, located below the calendar section,
then drag to select the required period in the calendar. The Patrol scheme list is only available if
you have selected a PTZ camera for which at least one patrol scheme has been set up.
When you set a Patrolling period, you may be able to select between several patrol schemes. This
will depend upon how many patrol schemes have been set up in the Setup PTZ Patrolling window.
If you set patrolling periods with different patrol schemes immediately following each other in
time, changes between patrolling schemes will be indicated by a thin vertical line (see also
Colored Bars in the following).
Colored Bars
The calendar uses colored bars to indicate active periods for each option (Online, E-mail, SMS, etc.):
•
In the Online bar, active periods are indicated in either pink or yellow:
•
Pink (•) indicates that the selected camera is continuously transferring video to the NetDVMS
software.
•
Yellow (•) indicates that the selected camera transfers video to the NetDVMS software when a
specified event occurs.
•
In the Speedup bar, active periods are indicated by olive green (•).
•
In the E-mail bar, active periods are indicated in blue (•).
•
In the SMS bar, active periods are indicated in green (•).
•
In the Patrolling bar, active periods are indicated in gray (•). Changes between patrolling
schemes are indicated by a thin vertical line. Note that the Patrolling bar is only available if
you have selected a PTZ camera for which patrolling has been set up.
Tip: When several patrol schemes are in use, you are able to see which patrol scheme is used for
a particular period: Click the relevant section of the gray bar; the name of the patrol scheme in
question will appear in the Patrol scheme list, located below the calendar section.
Colored bars indicating
active periods
171
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Input, Events & Output
Camera/Alerts Scheduler Window's Copy and Paste
Buttons
Button
Description
Copy
Schedule
Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section. When
used in combination with the Paste Schedule button, you are able
to quickly re-use schedules from one camera to another.
Paste
Schedule
Lets you paste a copied schedule for use with the selected camera.
The same copied schedule can be pasted to several cameras simply
by selecting, and pasting to, one camera after the other.
Tip: If you want to use a schedule for all cameras, specify a
schedule for one camera, then use the Copy and Paste to All button
to copy the schedule and paste it to all cameras in one go.
Copy and
Paste to
All
Lets you copy the schedule displayed in the calendar section and
paste it to all cameras in one go.
172
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Video Clients
Users can access a NetDVMS surveillance system in different ways:
•
With NetGuard (run straight from server, good selection of standard features)
Example of NetGuard
•
With NetGuard-EVS (installed locally, very feature-rich, based on the .NET platform and thus
highly flexible for future integration of plugins, etc.)
Example of NetGuard-EVS
•
With Ocularis Client Lite (installed locally, very feature-rich, based on the .NET platform and
thus highly flexible for future integration of plugins, etc.)
Example of Ocularis Client Lite
•
With NetPDA/NetCell Client installed on a handheld computer device with a wireless connection
173
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Example of NetPDA/NetCell Client
The way remote access is handled at the surveillance system server end is different, depending on
remote access method:
Server End: Providing Access through Clients
Surveillance system administrators use two administration tools for providing access through
NetGuard, NetGuard-EVS and Ocularis Client Lite:
Image Server
Recordings viewed by NetGuard, NetGuard-EVS and Ocularis Client Lite users are provided by the
NetDVMS surveillance system's Image Server. The Image Server runs as a service on the NetDVMS
server; it does not require separate hardware.
The system administrator uses the Image Server Administrator window to manage NetGuard,
NetGuard-EVS and Ocularis Client Lite access to the surveillance system.
Download Manager
In order to get copy of NetGuard, NetGuard-EVS or Ocularis Client Lite, users connect to the
surveillance system server which will present them with a welcome page. The welcome page will list
the available clients and language versions.
The system administrator uses the Download Manager to control which clients and language versions
should be available to users on the welcome page.
Server End: Providing Access Through NetPDA/NetCell
Client
Use of the NetPDA/NetCell Client requires that a matching NetPDA/NetCell Server is installed on the
surveillance system.
The NetPDA/NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services (IIS) server, and is used
as a front-end to the NetDVMS system's Image Server, on which user rights are defined.
The NetPDA/NetCell Server handles login and session requests between the NetPDA/NetCell Client and
the Image Server. The NetPDA/NetCell Server also handles resizing of surveillance video to fit the
screen layout of the NetPDA/NetCell Client.
174
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
For more information, see Installing & Configuring the NetPDA/NetCell Server as well as the
description of the Image Server Administrator window.
When deciding which access client solution is the best choice for your organization, you may find it
helpful to review the following.
Assess Your Organization's Needs
Note: Systems and requirements differ from organization to organization. The following questions and
answers are thus for guidance only.
Do you require a handheld solution?
• Yes: Use the NetPDA/NetCell Client/Server solution. If required, you can of course
combine the PDA solution with other remote access solutions, such as NetGuard-EVS.
• No: Determine your needs based on the questions and answers provided in the
following.
Is it acceptable to install client software on remote users' computers?
• Yes: Use Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS.
• No: Use NetGuard; remote users run NetGuard straight from the NetDVMS server.
Will you require a large amount of future flexibility from your remote access
solution?
• Yes: Use Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS. Due to the way the software has been
developed, these clients offers a high degree of flexibility for integration of new
features, plugins, etc.
• No: Use NetGuard.
Do you require a very feature-rich client application?
• Yes: Use Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS. These clients offer considerably more
features for remote users than the other solutions.
• No: Use NetGuard.
Do you require a large amount of flexibility re. remote users' ability to export data?
• Yes: Use NetGuard-EVS. NetGuard-EVS offers the ability to—individual user rights
permitting—export evidence in the AVI (movie clip), JPEG (still image) as well as
NetDVMS database formats.
• No: Use NetGuard. NetGuard offers the ability to—individual user rights permitting—
export evidence in the AVI and JPEG formats.
Will you use a .NET-based client application?
What is .NET?
The. NET software development platform allows the interconnection of computers and services
for the exchange and combination of data and objects. The platform makes extensive use of
so-called web services, which provide the ability to use the web rather than single applications
for various services. This in turn provides the ability for centralized data storage as well as
automated updating and synchronization of information.
The video platform enhances software developers' ability to create re-usable and customizable
modules, which makes it possible to develop highly flexible software solutions. You can
therefore, as a rule of thumb, expect video-based software to be highly flexible, ready for
integration of new features, plugins, etc.
175
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
However, organizations and their requirements are different, and some organizations find that
the high degree of interconnection of services and computers inherent in a video-based
solution is not desirable. Instead, such organizations rely on more classic Windows solutions.
•
•
Yes: Use Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS. These .NET-based clients offer more
features for remote users than the other solutions. .NET Framework, downloadable
from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/, is required on computers running
Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS. See the separate Ocularis Client Lite or
NetGuard-EVS documentation for exact system requirements.
No: Use NetGuard. NetGuard is not a .NET-based solution.
Differences between NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS
The following table outlines the main differences between NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS:
Two Access Clients at a
Glance
NetGuard
NetGuard-EVS
Remote User's
Installation
None; client is accessed
from server through a
browser.
Client must be installed on
remote user's computer.
.NET Framework is required
on computers running
NetGuard-EVS.
Remote User's Feature
Set
A good set of standard
features.
Very feature-rich.
Remote User's Ease of
Use
Very easy to use. Setup of views can be handled locally as
well as centrally. With central views handling, remote users
can begin using their clients instantly upon first login.
System Administrator's
Installation
The Image Server and Download Manager runs as
automatically installed services on the NetDVMS server.
Only if clients are required in other languages than the
NetDVMS server itself is additional installation required.
System Administrator's
Feature Set
Very flexible; configuration through the Image Server
Administrator and Download Manager includes masterslaves handling, handling of local IP address ranges,
language versions, etc.
System Administrator's
Access Control Options
Very flexible; choice of creating dedicated user accounts or
importing users and groups of users from Active Directory;
rights for accessing individual client and camera features
can be determined on a per-user or per-group basis.
Client Flexibility re.
Future Features and
Limited.
.NET-based, thus offering a
high degree of flexibility for
176
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Two Access Clients at a
Glance
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
NetGuard
Plugins
NetGuard-EVS
integration of new features,
plugins, etc.
Recommended Use
Systems on which
installation of client
software is not desirable.
Systems on which a .NET
client solution is not
desirable. Systems on
which the Active Directory
support lets you leverage
existing user accounts.
Systems on which a high
degree of flexibility, e.g.
use of remote access plugin
features, will be required.
Systems on which a .NET
client solution is desirable.
Systems on which the
Active Directory support
lets you leverage existing
user accounts.
NetGuard-EVS
NetGuard-EVS provides remote users with extremely feature-rich access to the surveillance system.
Tip: See system requirements for NetGuard-EVS under System Requirements.
NetGuard-EVS must be installed locally on the remote user's computer.
Installing NetGuard-EVS
NetGuard-EVS can be installed in three ways:
•
Download and Install NetGuard-EVS from the surveillance system server
•
Install NetGuard-EVS from the NetDVMS software DVD
•
Silent Installation (Surveillance System Administrators Only)
Removing NetGuard-EVS
See Removing NetGuard-EVS.
Where can I find more information about NetGuard-EVS? Once installed, NetGuard-EVS has
its own built-in help system. Alternatively, refer to the NetGuard-EVS User's Manual, available on the
NetDVMS software DVD.
Installation
Typically, you download NetGuard-EVS from the surveillance system server, then install it on your
computer. Alternatively, your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install NetGuard-EVS
from a DVD (see Installation from DVD).
177
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Note: Surveillance system administrators can automatically get a NetGuard-EVS installed on the
surveillance system server; this happens as part of the surveillance system server installation.
To download and install NetGuard-EVS from the surveillance system server, do the following:
1.
Verify that your computer meets NetGuard-EVS's minimum system requirements.
2.
Open an Internet Explorer browser (version 6.0 or later), and connect to the surveillance
system server at the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator. When you are
connected to the surveillance system server, you will see a welcome page.
3.
On the welcome page, select your required language in the menu in the top right corner. Then
go to the welcome page's NetGuard-EVS Installers section, and click the required NetGuardEVS language version link.
My welcome page is different, why? If your organization uses an older version of the
surveillance system server, the welcome page looks differently. In that case, go to the
welcome page's NetGuard-EVS section, and click the Download and Install NetGuard-EVS
Locally link.
4.
Depending on your security settings, you may receive one or more security warnings (Do you
want to run or save this file?, Do you want to run this software? or similar; exact wording
depends on your browser version). When this is the case, accept the security warnings (by
clicking Run or similar; exact button names depend on your browser version).
5.
NetGuard-EVS Setup Wizard begins. In the wizard, click Next, and follow the installation
instructions.
Typically, you download NetGuard-EVS from the surveillance system server, then install it on your
computer (see Download and Installation from Server). Alternatively, your surveillance system
administrator may ask you to install NetGuard-EVS from a DVD:
1.
Verify that your computer meets NetGuard-EVS's minimum system requirements.
2.
Insert the surveillance system software DVD, wait for a short while, select required language,
then click the Install NetGuard-EVS link.
Tip: Depending on your security settings, you may receive one or more security warnings
(Do you want to run or save this file?, Do you want to run this software? or similar; exact
wording depends on your browser version). When this is the case, accept the security
warnings (by clicking Run or similar; exact button names depend on your browser version).
3.
When the installation wizard starts, click Next to continue the installation and follow the steps
in the installation wizard.
For surveillance system administrators, it is possible to deploy NetGuard-EVS to users’ computers
using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS). Such tools let administrators build
up databases of hardware and software on local networks. The databases can then—among other
things—be used for distributing and installing software applications, such as NetGuard-EVS, over local
networks.
1.
Locate the self-extracting NetGuard-EVS installation (.exe) file.
You find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs. The httpdocs folder is located under
the folder in which your surveillance software is installed.
178
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Example of a relevant subfolder under the httpdocs folder: ...\httpdocs\NetGuard-EVS
Installers\3.5b\English\en-US.
2.
With an extraction tool, such as WinZip® or similar, extract the files contained in the
installation file to a folder of your choice.
When extraction is done, the folder to which you extracted will contain a small number of files,
among these a file with the extension .msi. The .msi file is a Microsoft Windows Installer
installation package covering the complete NetGuard-EVS installation procedure.
3.
You can now use your systems management tool to deploy the .msi file.
Alternatively, you can simply copy the msi. file to required computers, and run the .msi file
from a command prompt.
Ocularis Client Lite
Ocularis Client Lite also provides remote users with extremely feature-rich access to the surveillance
system.
Tip: See system requirements for Ocularis Client Lite under System Requirements.
Ocularis Client Lite must be installed locally on the remote user's computer.
Installing Ocularis Client Lite
Ocularis Client Lite can be installed in three ways:
•
Download and Install Ocularis Client Lite from the surveillance system server
•
Install Ocularis Client Lite from the NetDVMS software DVD
•
Silent Installation (Surveillance System Administrators Only)
Removing Ocularis Client Lite
Use Windows Control Panel Add or Remove Programs to remove Ocularis Client Lite.
Where can I find more information about Ocularis Client Lite? Once installed, Ocularis Client
Lite has its own built-in help system. Alternatively, refer to the Ocularis Client Lite User's Manual,
available on the NetDVMS software DVD.
Installation
Typically, you download Ocularis Client Lite from the surveillance system server, then install it on your
computer. Alternatively, your surveillance system administrator may ask you to install Ocularis Client
Lite from a DVD.
Note: Surveillance system administrators can automatically get a Ocularis Client Lite installed on the
surveillance system server; this happens as part of the surveillance system server installation.
To download and install Ocularis Client Lite from the surveillance system server, do the following:
179
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
1.
Verify that your computer meets Ocularis Client Lite minimum system requirements.
2.
Open an Internet Explorer browser (version 6.0 or later), and connect to the surveillance
system server at the URL or IP address specified by your system administrator. When you are
connected to the surveillance system server, you will see a welcome page.
4.
On the welcome page, select the link Download Ocularis Client Lite.
5.
From the resulting page, click the link Download Ocularis Client Lite.
6.
Depending on your security settings, you may receive one or more security warnings (Do you
want to run or save this file?, Do you want to run this software? or similar; exact wording
depends on your browser version). When this is the case, accept the security warnings (by
clicking Run or similar; exact button names depend on your browser version).
7.
Ocularis Client Lite Wizard begins. In the wizard, click Next, and follow the installation
instructions.
For surveillance system administrators, it is possible to deploy Ocularis Client Lite to users’ computers
using tools such as Microsoft Systems Management Server (SMS). Such tools let administrators build
up databases of hardware and software on local networks. The databases can then—among other
things—be used for distributing and installing software applications, such as Ocularis Client Lite, over
local networks.
1.
Locate the self-extracting Ocularis Client Lite installation (.exe) file.
You find the file in a subfolder under the folder httpdocs. The httpdocs folder is located under
the folder in which your surveillance software is installed.
Example of a relevant subfolder under the httpdocs folder: ...\httpdocs\Ocularis Client Lite
Installers\.
3.
With an extraction tool, such as WinZip® or similar, extract the files contained in the
installation file to a folder of your choice.
When extraction is done, the folder to which you extracted will contain a small number of files,
among these a file with the extension .msi. The .msi file is a Microsoft Windows Installer
installation package covering the complete Ocularis Client Lite installation procedure.
4.
You can now use your systems management tool to deploy the .msi file.
Alternatively, you can simply copy the msi. file to required computers, and run the .msi file
from a command prompt.
NetGuard
NetGuard provides users with access to the surveillance system. NetGuard does not offer nearly as
many features as Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS. The main benefit of NetGuard is that it is
accessed through a browser and run directly from the surveillance system server. This eliminates the
need for installing any client software on the user's computer.
Tip: See system requirements for NetGuard under System Requirements.
180
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Accessing NetGuard
1. Open an Internet Explorer browser (version 6.0 or later), and connect to surveillance
system server. The address format is typically:
http://[surveillance_system_server_address]:[port_number]
Tip: The port number is only required if using another port than the Image
Server's default port number, 80.
When you connect to the server, you will see a welcome page. On the welcome page,
click the NetGuard link in order to view the NetGuard login dialog.
2.
To log in, specify information in the following fields:
•
Previous Logins: Only available if you have logged in before. Lets you reuse
previously specified login details (except any password, which you must
always type yourself). This can greatly speed up the login process.
•
Address: Type the URL or IP address of the surveillance system server.
•
Port: Specify the port number to use when logging in to NetGuard. In most
circumstances, port 80 is used.
•
Authentication: Select required authentication method.
o
Windows (current user), with which you will be authenticated through
your current Windows login, and do not have to specify any user name
or password. This is the default authentication method, i.e. the
method which is automatically used unless you select another method.
o
Windows, with which you will be authenticated through your Windows
login, but you will need to type your Windows user name and
password.
o
Basic, with which you will be authenticated through a user/password
combination defined on the surveillance system server.
•
Username: Type your user name. The user name is case-sensitive, i.e. there
is a difference between typing, for example, amanda and Amanda.
•
Password: Type your password. The password is case-sensitive.
181
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
3.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Click the Login link. After a short wait, you get access to NetGuard. Content in
NetGuard is grouped on three tabs: Live, Browse and Setup.
The Live tab is used for viewing live video from cameras, the Browse tab is used for
finding and playing back recorded video, and the Setup tab is used for configuring
NetGuard.
Where can I find more information about NetGuard? Refer to NetGuard User's Manual,
available on the NetDVMS software DVD.
NetPDA/NetCell Client & Server
The NetPDA/NetCell Client and NetPDA/NetCell Server applications enable remote access to the
NetDVMS surveillance system via a PDA (Personal Digital Assistant; a handheld computer device) with
a wireless connection.
Handheld remote access can be highly valuable in many situations. For example, first responders to
break-ins, fires, etc. will be able to view live as well as recorded video of the incidents while on their
way to the incidents (wireless connection permitting).
Example: Live viewing in the NetPDA/NetCell Client
NetPDA/NetCell Server
The NetPDA/NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services (IIS) server, and is
used as a front-end to the NetDVMS system's Image Server.
The NetPDA/NetCell Server handles login and session requests between the NetPDA/NetCell
Client and the Image Server. The NetPDA/NetCell Server also handles resizing of surveillance
video to fit the screen layout of the NetPDA/NetCell Client.
182
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
NetPDA/NetCell Client
The NetPDA/NetCell Client is used for viewing live and recorded video from the NetDVMS
surveillance system on the PDA.
Moving on ...
See system requirements for the NetPDA/NetCell Server and NetPDA/NetCell Client under
System Requirements.
Everything else you need to know about the NetPDA/NetCell Server and NetPDA/NetCell Client
is described in the following topics: Installing & Configuring the NetPDA/NetCell Server,
Installing & Configuring the NetPDA/NetCell Client, and Using the NetPDA/NetCell Client.
The NetPDA/NetCell Server is installed on an Internet Information Services (IIS) server, and is used
as a front-end to the NetDVMS system's Image Server. The NetPDA/NetCell Server handles login and
session requests between the NetPDA/NetCell Client and the Image Server. The NetPDA/NetCell
Server also handles resizing of surveillance video to fit the screen layout of the NetPDA/NetCell Client.
Before the NetPDA/NetCell Server can be installed on a server, Internet Information Services (IIS) and
Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 (version 1.1.4322 or later) must be installed and configured on the
server.
Installing IIS and .NET Framework
To Install IIS and .NET Framework on the server, do the following:
IIS Installation
Note: The following procedure describes IIS installation on Windows XP. If you are using Windows
2000 Server or Windows 2003 Server, IIS and .NET Framework are normally installed during the
installation of the operating system.
1. In Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel, then Add or Remove Programs.
2. In the left part of the Add or Remove Programs dialog, click Add/Remove Windows
Components. This will open the Windows Components Wizard.
3. In the wizard's Components list, select Internet Information Services (IIS) and click Next:
183
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
4. Follow the wizard's instructions to complete the installation.
.NET Framework Verification
.NET Framework version 1.1.4322 must be installed on the server in order to be able to run the
NetPDA/NetCell Server.
Note that later versions of .NET Framework may also be present on the server. If .NET Framework 1.1
as well as one or more later versions are present on the server, Windows' default settings may cause
a later .NET Framework version to be used instead of .NET Framework 1.1.4322.
To verify/change which .NET Framework version is used, do the following:
1. Click Start, and select Control Panel.
2. Click Administrative Tools.
3. Click Internet Information Services.
4. In the Internet Information Services window's left pane, locate and right-click the Default Web
Site item:
Example only; content on
your server may be different
5. In the resulting menu, select Properties. This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog.
6. Select the dialog's ASP.NET tab.
The .NET Framework version in use will be indicated in the ASP.NET version field.
184
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
7. If required, change the ASP.NET version to 1.1.4322:
Example only; other versions may be
available on your server
8. Click OK.
9. Close the Internet Information Services and Administrative Tools windows if still open.
Allowing Use of .NET Framework (Windows 2003 Only)
When .NET Framework is installed, you must allow use of .NET Framework by doing the following:
1. Click Start, and select Control Panel.
2. Click Administrative Tools.
3. Click Internet Information Services.
4. In the Internet Information Services Manager’s left pane, select the Web Service Extensions
item.
5. On the Extended tab in the Internet Information Services Manager’s right pane, select
ASP.NET v1.1.4322, and click the Allow button:
185
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
.NET Framework Registration
When IIS and .NET Framework are installed, you must register .NET Framework in the IIS:
1. In Windows' Start menu, select Run....
2. In the Open field, type C:\WINDOWS\Framework\v1.1.4322\aspnet_regiis.exe -i (where
v1.1.4322 refers to the .NET Framework version).
Note: Make sure you have included the -i parameter.
3. Click OK to register the .NET Framework in IIS.
Tip: When IIS and .NET Framework have been installed and registered, it is a good idea to use
Windows Update to check for, and download, any new service packs or security packs.
Installing the NetPDA/NetCell Server
To Install the NetPDA/NetCell Server, do the following:
Note: The following procedures describe installation of the NetPDA/NetCell Server as the only
application using IIS on the server, and with its default settings. If IIS is also used for other
applications, it is recommended that you consult an experienced IIS administrator prior to installing
the NetPDA/NetCell Server.
First Step: IIS Port Configuration
Before you begin installing the NetPDA/NetCell Server, you must configure IIS to use the port number
on which the NetPDA/NetCell Server is going to run:
•
In Windows' Start menu, select Run....
•
In the Open field, type inetmgr.exe and click OK. This will display the Internet Information
Services dialog.
186
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
In the left part of the dialog, expand the computer item until you see the Default Web Site
item:
Example only; details enlarged for clarity; computer
name is likely to be different on your server
•
Right-click the Default Web Site item, and select Properties.
This will open the Default Web Site Properties dialog.
•
On the dialog's Web Site tab, set the TCP Port number to the number that NetPDA/NetCell
Server is going to use (the default port for the NetPDA/NetCell Server is 8080), then click OK:
•
Back in the Internet Information Services dialog, verify that IIS is running.
If IIS is not running, start IIS by right-clicking the Default Web Site item, then selecting Start.
Then:
NetPDA/NetCell Server Installation
Having configured the IIS port number, you are ready to begin installation of the NetPDA/NetCell
Server itself:
•
On the server, insert the NetDVMS software DVD, wait for a short while, select required language,
then click the Install NetPDA/NetCell Server link.
187
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Alternatively, if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet, run the NetPDA/NetCell
Server installation file PDAServerInstaller_[required language].exe from the location you have
saved it to.
Tip: Depending on your security settings, you may receive one or more security warnings (Do
you want to run or save this file?, Do you want to run this software?). When this is the case, click
the Run button.
•
Read and accept the license agreement. This will take you to the Image server setup step.
•
In the Hostname/IP Address field, specify the IP address or host name of the NetDVMS server to
which the NetPDA/NetCell Server should connect.
Tip: If installing the NetPDA/NetCell Server on the same server as the surveillance system
itself, simply specify Localhost.
Tip: If the NetPDA/NetCell Server should connect to a master/slave system, specify the IP
address or host name of the master server.
In the Port field, specify the port number used by the surveillance system's Image Server (default
is port 80), then click Next.
•
An Important Note is displayed; it is highly recommended that you read it. When ready, click
Next. This will take you to the Select Installation Address step.
•
In the Virtual directory field, specify the virtual directory in which the NetPDA/NetCell Server
should be installed on the IIS (default virtual directory is NetPDA/NetCell Server).
In the Port field, specify the port number you used during IIS configuration (default port number
is 8080).
•
Click Next twice.
•
When installation is completed, click the Close button.
Verifying the NetPDA/NetCell Server Installation
Before you begin installing and using the NetPDA/NetCell Client, it is highly recommended that you
verify that the NetPDA/NetCell Server is installed correctly:
First make sure that the NetDVMS system's recording server service and Image Server service are
running, and that a user with access to relevant cameras has been set up in the Image Server
Administrator.
Tip: You can use a NetGuard or NetGuard-EVS to verify that the Image Server's user setup works.
Then do the following:
•
Double-click the PDAServer desktop shortcut created during the NetPDA/NetCell Server
installation:
This will open the NetPDA/NetCell Server Administrator dialog:
188
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
In the lower half of the NetPDA/NetCell Server Administrator dialog, verify that the Test enabled
check box is selected, then click the link below the check box to open the test interface in a
browser:
•
Log in to the test interface by typing the user name and password as set up on the Image Server,
then click the Login button.
The test interface will now log in to the Image Server, and list all cameras to which the user has
access.
•
Click one of the camera links in the test interface's left frame.
If an image (the latest recorded image from the selected camera) is displayed, the
NetPDA/NetCell Server is installed correctly:
189
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
NetPDA/NetCell Server Installation Troubleshooting
The following issues may occasionally occur during or upon installation of the NetPDA/NetCell Server.
For each issue, one or more solutions are available.
NetPDA/NetCell Server Cannot Be Installed
Solutions:
•
Make sure that IIS is installed.
•
Make sure that IIS is set up to use the correct port (default is port 8080), and that the same port
number was used when the virtual directory was specified.
•
Make sure that IIS is running.
Test Interface Cannot Be Displayed
Solutions:
•
Make sure that the .NET Framework is registered on the IIS.
•
Make sure that IIS is running.
Test Interface Is Displayed, but It Is Not Possible to Log In
Solutions:
•
Start the NetPDA/NetCell Server Administrator from the desktop shortcut, and verify that the IP
address or hostname in the Host/IP field points to your Image Server. Also make sure that the
port number in the Port field matches the port number on which the Image Server service is
running.
•
Make sure that the Image Server service is running on the surveillance system.
•
Make sure that the user account used when accessing the test interface has been correctly set up
on the Image Server, and that the user account provides access to the required cameras.
The NetPDA/NetCell Client is installed on the PDA itself by using a PC with the Microsoft ActiveSync
synchronization program: First you install the NetPDA/NetCell Client on the PC, then you use
ActiveSync to transfer the NetPDA/NetCell Client from the PC to the PDA.
Tip: If ActiveSync is not installed on the PC, you can download the latest version from
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/.
190
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Installing the NetPDA/NetCell Client
Note: Before using the following procedure, connect the PDA to the PC, install the ActiveSync
program on the PC, and set up synchronization with the PDA.
To install the NetPDA/NetCell Client, do the following:
•
On the PC, insert the NetDVMS software DVD, wait for a short while, select required
language, then click the Install NetPDA/NetCell Client link.
Alternatively, if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet, run the
NetPDA/NetCell Client installation file PDAClientInstaller_[required language].exe from
the location you have saved it to.
Tip: Depending on your security settings, you may receive one or more security
warnings (Do you want to run or save this file?, Do you want to run this software?).
When this is the case, click the Run button.
•
Read and accept the license agreement.
•
Select the folder in which to install the NetPDA/NetCell Client software on the PC.
•
Click Next twice to begin the installation process.
•
When installation is complete, click the Close button.
After installing the NetPDA/NetCell Client on the PC, the ActiveSync program will
display the Add/Remove Programs dialog, which lets you transfer and install the
NetPDA/NetCell Client on the PDA.
•
Click Yes to install the NetPDA/NetCell Client in the default location on the PDA.
Checking the Wireless Connection
Before using the NetPDA/NetCell Client, verify that the wireless connection to the PDA is configured
and working correctly.
You can quickly check the wireless connection by pinging the IP address of the PDA from a command
prompt on the server on which the NetPDA/NetCell Server is installed.
What is pinging? Pinging is a quick way of determining whether an IP address is available; you
simply send a small amount of data to the required IP address in order to see if it responds. The word
ping, it is said, was chosen because it mirrors the sound of a sonar.
How do I ping? To ping an IP address, do the following: In Windows' Start menu, select Run.... In
the Open field, type cmd and click OK. This will open a command prompt window. Now type ping
followed by the required IP address (example: ping 123.123.123.123), then press ENTER on your
keyboard. If the pinged IP address is available, you will see a reply message and some simple
statistics (see example illustration 1); if the IP address does not respond, you will typically see a
Request timed out message (see example illustration 2).
191
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Example 1: Successful pinging; pinged IP address replies
Example 2: Unsuccessful pinging; ping request times out
Starting and Configuring the NetPDA/NetCell Client
You start the NetPDA/NetCell Client by tapping your PDA's Start button, selecting Programs, then
tapping the NetPDA/NetCell Client icon.
When first started, your NetPDA/NetCell Client must be configured before it is able to connect to the
NetPDA/NetCell Server.
Note: During configuration you will be asked to specify the NetPDA/NetCell Server's IP address, port
number and virtual directory. Consult your surveillance system administrator if in doubt.
To configure your NetPDA/NetCell Client, do the following:
1.
Tap anywhere on your NetPDA/NetCell Client's opening page.
2.
Hold down the pointer pen until the a menu is shown:
3.
In the menu, select Configuration. This will open the NetPDA/NetCell Client's
configuration page:
192
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
4.
In the configuration page's Host / IP field, specify the IP address of the server running
the NetPDA/NetCell Server. In the example in step 3, the IP address of the server is
192.168.128.10.
5.
In the Port field, specify the port on which the NetPDA/NetCell Server is running.
Default is 8080.
6.
In the Application field, specify the virtual directory in which the NetPDA/NetCell
Server is installed (on the IIS). Default is PDAServer/.
7.
Tap OK to store the configuration.
You are now ready to use your NetPDA/NetCell Client; see Using the NetPDA/NetCell Client for more
information.
The NetPDA/NetCell Client is used for viewing live and recorded video from the NetDVMS surveillance system on a
PDA.
Starting the NetPDA/NetCell Client
You start the NetPDA/NetCell Client by tapping your PDA's Start button, selecting Programs, then
tapping the NetPDA/NetCell Client icon.
Logging In to the NetPDA/NetCell Client
You start the NetPDA/NetCell Client by tapping your PDA's Start button, selecting Programs, then
tapping the NetPDA/NetCell Client icon.
Viewing Live Video
From the NetPDA/NetCell Client's camera list page you have access to viewing live video.
193
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Camera list page
Selecting a Camera for Live Viewing
In the camera list, select the required camera.
Tap the LIVE button.
You will now see live video from the selected camera in the NetPDA/NetCell Client's regular view, in
which about half of the display is available for viewing the video:
If you require a better view of the video, you can easily switch to full screen view; this is described in
the following.
194
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Full Screen View
When viewing live video in the NetPDA/NetCell Client's regular view, tap the Full Screen icon
switch to a full screen (rotated) view:
to
Tip: As an alternative to tapping the Full Screen icon, simply tap anywhere inside the regular view's
live image area.
When in full screen view, tap anywhere inside the live image area to return to regular view.
PTZ Control
If the selected camera is a PTZ (Pan/Tilt/Zoom) camera, you are able to control the position of the
camera with the NetPDA/NetCell Client's PTZ controls:
To move a PTZ camera, tap one of the PTZ control's direction arrows to move the camera in the
required direction.
Tapping the center button will move the PTZ camera to its home (i.e. default) position.
To zoom in and out, tap the Zoom icons
.
Tip: You are also able to control the position of the PTZ camera by using the navigation buttons on
the PDA itself. If you are viewing the live video in the rotated full screen view, PTZ control with the
PDA's navigation buttons is automatically rotated to match the view.
195
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
PTZ Preset Positions
If PTZ preset positions have been set up for the selected PTZ camera, you are able to move the PTZ
camera to the preset positions.
To move a camera to a preset position, select the required position in the Sel preset list:
Note: The list is not available when video is viewed in full screen.
Output Control
If manually controlled output (such as lights, sirens, etc.) has been set up for the selected camera,
you are able to trigger the output from the NetPDA/NetCell Client.
To trigger an output, select the required output in the Sel output list:
Returning to the Camera List Page
To return to the camera list page, tap the Return icon
regular view.
. The Return icon is only available when using
Viewing Recorded Video
From the NetPDA/NetCell Client's camera list page you have access to viewing recorded video.
Camera list page
196
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Selecting a Camera for Viewing of Recordings
In the camera list, select the required camera.
Tap the PLAYBACK button. You are now able to browse recorded video from the selected camera:
Browsing and Playing Back Recorded Video
To browse recorded video, tap the Browse buttons:
The Browse buttons work just as you are used to from NetDVMS's other client applications. From left
to right, they are: Move to first image in camera's database, Move to previous sequence, Move to
previous image, Move to next image, Move to next sequence, Move to last image in camera's
database.
When you have browsed to the point in time you want to view recordings from, use the Playback
buttons:
From left to right, the Playback buttons are: Play backward in time, Stop, Play forward in time.
To control the playback speed, use the Playback Speed slider:
Tip: You are also able to control playback by using the navigation buttons on the PDA itself: Left
button starts reverse playback, right button starts forward playback, center button stops playback,
and the up and down buttons take you to the next and previous sequence respectively. If you are
viewing the recorded video in the rotated full screen view, playback control with the PDA's navigation
buttons is automatically rotated to match the view.
197
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
Finding Recordings from a Specific Time and Date
If you know the exact data and time you want to view recorded video from, tap the Go to icon
will display the Goto selected data/time page:
. This
Specify the required date in the Date field, and the required time (hours-minutes-seconds) in the Time
fields, then tap OK.
The playback view will now display an image recorded at the specified time. If no recordings are
available from the specified time, the last image recorded before the specified time will be displayed.
Finding Recordings from a Specific Event
By tapping the Alarms icon
, you are able to view a list of recordings of detected events
(occasionally known as alarms) for the selected camera:
198
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Clients
To view recordings of an event, select the required event in the list, then tap the SELECT button.
The list is able to display up to 16 recorded events at a time. If the list contains more than 16
recorded events, use the Browse buttons to navigate the list:
The two outer buttons take you to the first/last 16 recorded events; the two inner buttons take you to
the previous/next 16 recorded events.
Full Screen View
You will normally see recorded video from the selected camera in the NetPDA/NetCell Client's regular
view. In regular view, only about half of the display is available for viewing the video, as the rest of
the space is taken up by the navigation controls.
If you require a better view of the video, you can easily switch to full screen view:
When viewing recorded video in the NetPDA/NetCell Client's regular view, tap the Full Screen icon
to switch to a full screen (rotated) view:
Tip: As an alternative to tapping the Full Screen icon, simply tap anywhere inside the regular view's
live image area.
When in full screen view, tap anywhere inside the live image area to return to regular view.
Returning to the Camera List Page
To return to the camera list page, tap the Return icon
regular view.
. The Return icon is only available when using
Logging Out of the NetPDA/NetCell Client
Before closing your PDA, you must log out of the NetPDA/NetCell Client. You log out by tapping the
Logout icon on the camera list page:
199
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Viewer
Viewer
The Viewer is a standalone application which lets you browse and play back video recordings. The
Viewer also lets you print still images, send still images via e-mail, and export entire video and audio
sequences in a variety of formats.
The Viewer can be accessed in two ways:
•
If you work on the surveillance system server: On the surveillance system server, the
Viewer is automatically installed as part of the NetDVMS installation. You access the Viewer
from Windows' Start menu: Select Start > All Programs > NetDVMS > Viewer.
•
By people who have received video evidence material from your surveillance system:
This type of users are typically police officers, internal or external investigators, or similar.
When NetGuard-EVS operators export video evidence, they are able to include the Viewer with
the exported evidence. This is a great advantage for the recipient of the exported evidence,
since no installation is required in order to use the Viewer for browsing exported evidence.
Where can I find more information about the Viewer? The Viewer has its own built-in help
system. Alternatively, refer to the Viewer User's Manual, available on the NetDVMS software DVD.
200
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
NetMatrix Monitor
NetMatrix is an integrated product allowing distributed viewing of video from any camera on any
monitor on a network operating with NetDVMS.
A computer on which NetMatrix-triggered video can be shown is known as a NetMatrix recipient. Being
able to view NetMatrix-triggered video requires that either the NetMatrix Monitor application or a
NetGuard-EVS is installed on the NetMatrix recipient computer.
Example: Viewing video in
the NetMatrix Monitor application
There are two ways in which NetMatrix-triggered video can appear on a NetMatrix recipient:
•
Another user wants to share important video, and sends it from the surveillance system's
Monitor application, from Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS, or from a custom-made web
page to the required NetMatrix recipient
•
The images are sent to the required NetMatrix recipient automatically when a predefined event
occurs; for example when a door sensor detects that a door is opened, or when the
surveillance system detects motion in the video from a camera
As part of the data exchange between computers on the NetDVMS/NetMatrix system, other computers
(exactly which computers are defined as part of the NetMatrix configuration) are able to send
commands to NetMatrix recipients. The commands typically tell the NetMatrix recipient to connect to—
or disconnect from—video feeds from a particular cameras.
In the following, you will find information about installing the NetMatrix Monitor application,
configuring the NetMatrix Monitor Application, and day-to-day use of the NetMatrix Monitor
application.
Note: Read the License Terms on the Product License Sheet (enclosed with the software DVD) before
installing the NetMatrix Monitor application. Since the NetMatrix Monitor software communicates
directly with cameras, it is important that NetMatrix Monitor users download and install the latest
video device drivers; see Updating Video Device Drivers.
To install the NetMatrix Monitor application, do the following:
1.
Insert the NetDVMS software DVD, wait for a short while, select required language, then click
the Install NetMatrix Monitor link.
Alternatively, if you are installing a version downloaded from the internet, run the file
Monitor.exe from the location you have saved it to.
Tip: Depending on your security settings, you may receive one or more security warnings
201
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
(Do you want to run or save this file?, Do you want to run this software?). When this is the
case, click the Run button.
2.
When the installation wizard starts, click Next to continue the installation.
3.
Read and accept the License Agreement.
4.
Specify your User Name and Company Name:
You furthermore have the option of selecting whether the NetMatrix Monitor application should
be available just for you, or for anyone using the computer. If in doubt, select Anyone ...
When ready, click Next.
5.
Follow the next few simple steps in the installation wizard until you are asked to select the
setup type that best suits your needs:
•
If you want a shortcut to the NetMatrix Monitor application placed on your desktop
automatically, keep Add shortcut to desktop selected.
•
If you want the NetMatrix Monitor application to run automatically each time the
computer loads Windows, keep Add NetMatrix Monitor to Startup group selected.
When ready, click Next twice.
6.
Click Finish on the last step to complete the installation.
The way you access the configuration window for the NetMatrix Monitor application differs depending
on whether you configure the NetMatrix Monitor application for the first time or you want to make
changes to the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor application.
202
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
First Time Configuration
To configure the NetMatrix Monitor application for the first time, do the following:
1.
Double-click the NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop.
This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window.
2.
Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor in the
Password and Retype Password fields.
The password must match the password that has been specified for your NetMatrix
Monitor on the surveillance system server; consult your surveillance system
administrator if in doubt.
Tip: Memorize the password; you will need it if you want to change your NetMatrix
Monitor application's configuration at a later stage.
3.
Specify the port number on which your NetMatrix Monitor will listen for commands
(e.g. about connecting to a camera). By default, port 12345 is used.
The port number must match the port number that has been specified for your
NetMatrix Monitor on the surveillance system server; consult your surveillance system
administrator if in doubt.
4.
Specify which hosts (other computers) are allowed to send commands to your
NetMatrix Monitor.
If commands from any host should be accepted, simply select Allow All Hosts.
If only commands from particular hosts should be accepted, leave the Allow All Hosts
box cleared, and do the following to add each required host:
5. Specify the IP address of the host in the field below the large Allowed Hosts box in the
right side of the window:
Tip: To jump to the next IP address segment in the field, press SPACE on your
keyboard.
a.
Click the Add button to add the host to the list of Allowed Hosts.
b.
Repeat for each required host.
Tip: If you later want to remove a host from the list, simply select the unwanted
host in the list, then click the Delete button.
6.
Now you are able to customize the behavior of your NetMatrix Monitor application; you
do this by adjusting settings in the window's Run Mode section.
Tip: The NetMatrix Monitor application is pre-configured with typically required
behavior (settings marked by (default) in the following list). You do not need to adjust
the settings listed in this step unless you want to customize the way your NetMatrix
203
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
Monitor application should behave; consult your surveillance system administrator if in
doubt.
•
Always On Top: If selected (default), this setting forces the NetMatrix
Monitor window on top of other windows. This setting can subsequently be
changed from a menu accessible by right-clicking inside the NetMatrix Monitor
window.
•
Auto Accept All Commands: If selected (default), this setting will make your
NetMatrix Monitor application automatically accept all commands received
from allowed hosts (provided the commands are accompanied by the correct
password). If this setting is not used, a dialog in the NetMatrix Monitor window
will prompt you to accept each received command.
•
Display Camera Info: If selected (default), this setting will show camera
information in the NetMatrix Monitor window. This allows camera names or
camera IP addresses to be displayed, even if the NetMatrix Monitor window is
running in full screen mode.
The same image with and without camera information
•
Keep Video Aspect Ratio: If selected (default), this setting will keep the
original aspect ratio (i.e. height/width relationship) when the NetMatrix
Monitor window is resized. If this setting is not used, video will be stretched to
fill the available space.
The same image with (left) and without (right) original aspect
ratio. Note how keeping the original aspect ratio often leads
to black bars around the video, whereas stretching may
distort the video slightly.
•
Reconnect On Startup: If selected (default), the NetMatrix Monitor will
automatically attempt to connect to the last connected camera when starting.
If this setting is not used, no camera connection will be attempted at startup.
204
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
Camera Layout: Lets you select whether the NetMatrix Monitor window
should run in 1×1 or 2×2 mode.
o
In 1×1 mode, the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of displaying
video feeds from a single camera at a time:
o
In 2×2 mode (default), the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of
showing video feeds from up to four cameras at a time:
If using 2×2 mode, the video feeds will be inserted in top-left-tobottom-right order, according to a first-in-first-out principle: Video
feeds will remain in the position in which they were loaded; when all
four positions are used, any new video feeds will replace the oldest
image feeds.
If you select Insert Camera On Top, new video feeds will always be
displayed in the top left position while any previously received video
feeds will be shifted one position forward and eventually be “pushed
out:”
•
Startup Mode: Lets you select how the NetMatrix Monitor window should
open when starting.
o
With Full Screen, the NetMatrix Monitor window will open in full screen
mode, i.e. completely maximized, without any title bar, etc.
o
With Window, the NetMatrix Monitor window will open in regular mode,
i.e. as a scalable window with a title bar, etc.
205
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
o
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
With Hidden, the NetMatrix Monitor window will load in hidden mode,
in which you will not see the window until there is video to display. You
will, however, still be able to access the window by clicking the icon in
Windows' notification area (also known as the system tray; typically
located in NetMatrix the bottom right corner of your screen):
Example only; your notification
area may have different content
Depending on your On Connect settings (see the following), a
hidden NetMatrix Monitor window can automatically be restored to
previous size when a connect command is received.
•
•
7.
On Connect: Lets you determine how the NetMatrix Monitor window should
react when a connect command is received.
o
Show Alert: If selected, this setting will show a small alert box in the
bottom right corner of your screen when a connect command is
received. The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds.
o
Show Window: If selected, this setting will automatically restore a
NetMatrix Monitor window in hidden mode to previous size when a
connect command is received.
On Disconnect: Lets you determine how the NetMatrix Monitor window
should react when a disconnect command is received.
o
Show Alert: If selected, this setting will show a small alert box in the
bottom right corner of your screen when a disconnect command is
received. The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds.
o
Hide Window: If selected, this setting will automatically send the
NetMatrix Monitor window to hidden mode when a disconnect
command is received. When the window is in hidden mode, you still be
able to access it by clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows' notification
area (also known as the system tray).
When ready, click OK.
206
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix
Monitor
To change the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor, do the following:
1. Open the NetMatrix Monitor window.
Right-click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window, and select Config from the menu
that appears:
2. Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor:
3. Click OK.
This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window. Each of the window's settings is
described in the previous section, First Time Configuration.
4. Make the required changes, and click OK when ready.
You watch video feeds from connected cameras in the NetMatrix Monitor window.
Opening the NetMatrix Monitor Window
Depending on configuration, the NetMatrix Monitor window may appear on your screen automatically.
If the NetMatrix Monitor application is not running, you can start it by double-clicking the NetMatrix
Monitor shortcut on your desktop.:
You may also find that the NetMatrix Monitor application is running, but in hidden mode. When the
NetMatrix Monitor application runs in hidden mode, you will not see the NetMatrix Monitor window
until there is video to display. You will, however, still be able to access the window by double-clicking
the NetMatrix icon in Windows' notification area (also known as the system tray; typically located in
the bottom right corner of your screen):
Example only; your notification
area may have different content
1×1 and 2×2 View
Depending on configuration, your NetMatrix Monitor window will display either a 1×1 or a 2×2 view:
207
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
• With 1×1, the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of displaying video feeds from a single
camera at a time:
• With 2×2, the NetMatrix Monitor window is capable of showing video feeds from up to four
cameras at a time:
If using 2×2, the video feeds will be inserted in top-left-to-bottom-right order, according to
a first-in-first-out principle: Video feeds will remain in the position in which they were
loaded; when all four positions are used, any new video feeds will replace the oldest video
feeds.
A slightly different configuration is also possible, in which case new video feeds will always
be displayed in the top left position while any previously received video feeds will be shifted
one position forward and eventually be “pushed out:”
Camera Information
Depending on configuration, the NetMatrix Monitor window is able to show camera information
immediately above images:
The same image with and without camera information
208
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
Image Aspect Ratios
Depending on configuration, video in the NetMatrix Monitor window can either be displayed with its
original aspect ratio, or be stretched to fill the available space:
The same image with (left) and without (right) original aspect
ratio. Note how keeping the original aspect ratio often leads
to black bars around the video, whereas stretching may
distort the video slightly
Toggling between Regular and Full Screen View
To quickly toggle between viewing the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen or regular view,
double-click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window.
Changing the Configuration of a Running NetMatrix
Monitor
To change the configuration of a running NetMatrix Monitor, do the following:
1.
Open the NetMatrix Monitor window.
Right-click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window, and select Config from the menu that
appears:
2.
Specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor:
3.
Click OK.
This will open the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window. Each of the window's settings is
described in the previous section, First Time Configuration.
4.
Make the required changes, and click OK when ready.
Accepting Received Commands
209
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
As part of the data exchange between computers on the NetMatrix system, other computers (exactly which
computers are defined as part of your NetMatrix Monitor application's configuration) are able to send commands to
your NetMatrix Monitor. The commands typically tell your NetMatrix Monitor to connect to—or disconnect from—a
video feed from a particular camera.
As part of the configuration, your NetMatrix Monitor application may have been set up to automatically accept all
received commands, in which case new video feeds will automatically be displayed in your NetMatrix Monitor
window.
If your NetMatrix Monitor has not been set up to automatically accept all received commands, you will
be prompted to accept all received commands before they are executed. When a command is
received, a small dialog will be displayed in the bottom right corner of your screen. The dialog will
display the IP address or hostname of the sender as well as information about the command itself.
To accept the command, click the Accept button. If you do not want to accept the command, click the Decline
button.
Alerts upon Executed Commands
As part of the configuration, your NetMatrix Monitor application may have been set up to automatically display
alerts each time a command is executed.
When this is the case, a small alert box will be displayed in the bottom right corner of your screen
upon each executed command. The alert box will inform you about the executed command.
The alert box will close automatically after 10 seconds. If required, you can close the alert box manually at any
time.
Shortcut Menus
Two shortcut menus are available when working with the NetMatrix Monitor application:
210
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
NetMatrix Monitor Window Shortcut Menu
By right-clicking anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor window, you get access to a shortcut menu:
The shortcut menu has the following options:
•
Full Screen: Lets you view the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen mode, i.e.
completely maximized, without any title bar, etc. To return to regular view, simply select
Full Screen again.
Tip: To quickly toggle between viewing the NetMatrix Monitor window in full screen or
regular view, you can also simply double-click anywhere inside the NetMatrix Monitor
window.
•
Always On Top: Forces the NetMatrix Monitor window on top of other windows on your
screen.
•
Config: Lets you access the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window. Note that before the
NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window opens, you will be prompted to specify the
password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor:
•
Hide Window: Sends the NetMatrix Monitor window to hidden mode, in which you will not
see the window until there are images to display. You will, however, still be able to access
the window by clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows' notification area (also known as the
system tray; typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen):
Example only; your notification
area may have different content
Notification Area Shortcut Menu
By right-clicking the NetMatrix icon in Windows' notification area, you get access to another shortcut
menu:
211
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
NetMatrix Monitor
The shortcut menu has the following options:
•
Show Window: Restores the NetMatrix Monitor window in either regular or full screen view,
depending on configuration.
•
Config: Lets you access the NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window. Note that before the
NetMatrix Monitor Configuration window opens, you will be prompted to specify the
password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor.
•
Exit: Shuts down the NetMatrix Monitor application. Note that before the application closes,
you will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your
NetMatrix Monitor.
A shut down NetMatrix Monitor application can be started again by double-clicking the
NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop.
Shutting Down the NetMatrix Monitor Application
Closing the NetMatrix Monitor window by clicking the close button in the NetMatrix Monitor window's
title bar will not in itself shut down NetMatrix Monitor application; it will merely send the window into
hidden mode.
To shut down NetMatrix Monitor application, do the following:
1.
Right-click the NetMatrix icon in Windows' notification area (also known as the system tray;
typically located in the bottom right corner of your screen):
Example only; your notification
area may have different content
Right-clicking the notification area's NetMatrix icon lets you access a shortcut menu:
2.
From the menu, select Exit.
Note that before the application closes, you will be prompted to specify the password
required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor.
A shut down NetMatrix Monitor application can be started again by double-clicking the
NetMatrix Monitor shortcut on your desktop.
212
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Device Drivers
Logging
Various types of log files can be generated by NetDVMS:
Log File Types, Locations and Names
NetDVMS is able to generate the following types of log files:
Administrator Application Log Files
These files log activity in the Administrator application. A log file is created for each day the
Administrator is used.
Administrator log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software. Note,
however, that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General
Settings window's Logfile Settings section.
Administrator log files are named according to the structure AdminYYYYMMDD.log, e.g.
Admin20070615.log.
Recording Server Service Log Files
These files log activity in the recording server when it runs as the Recording Server service. A log file
is created for each day the service is used.
Recording Server service log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software.
Note, however, that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General
Settings window's Logfile Settings section.
Recording Server service log files are named according to the structure
RecordingServerYYYYMMDD.log, e.g. RecordingServer20070615.log.
Event Log Files
These files log information about registered events (read more about events in About Input, Events &
Output ...). A log file is created for each day on which events have occurred.
Event log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software. Note, however,
that the location as well as the number of days to log can be changed in the General Settings
window's Event Recording Settings section.
Event log files should be viewed using NetGuard-EVS: or the Viewer:
•
NetGuard-EVS: In the Browse tab's Alerts section, select the required event, then click
the Get List button to see when the event in question was detected.
•
Viewer: Select the Viewer’s Alarm Overview control panel, then click the Events button to
view the events log.
213
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Device Drivers
Image Server Service Log Files
These files log activity on the Image Server service. A log file is created for each day the Image
Server is used.
Image Server log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software.
Image Server log files are named according to the structure ISLog_YYYYMMDD.log, e.g.
ISLog_20070615.log.
Image Server Service Audit Log Files
These files log NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS user activity, if audit logging is enabled in the Image
Server Administrator. A log file is created for each day with remote user activity.
Image Server audit log files are by default placed in a subfolder named ISAuditLog under the folder
containing the NetDVMS software.
Image Server audit log files are named according to the structure is_auditYYYMMDD.log, e.g.
is_audit20070615.log.
Web Server Log Files
These files log activity on the Web Server, if logging is enabled in the NetDVMS HTTP Server window.
Web Server log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software.
Web Server log files are named according to the structure www_YYYYMMDD.log, e.g.
www_20070615.log.
Image Import Service Log Files
These files log activity regarding the Image Import service, which is used for fetching pre-alarm
images, and storing the fetched images in the database. Pre-alarm images is a feature available for
selected cameras only; it enables sending of images from immediately before an event took place
from the camera to the surveillance system via e-mail.
Image Import Service log files are by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS software.
Image Import Service log files are named according to the structure ImageImportLog_YYYMMDD.log,
e.g. ImageImportLog20070615.log.
Export Log Files
These files log activity regarding database export from the Viewer. A log file is created for each day on
which export was performed.
Export log files are by default, exported databases as well as the export log file are placed in an
Exported Images folder on the desktop of the computer on which the export was performed. Note,
however, that the export location may be changed as part of the export process.
Export log files are named according to the structure ExportYYYMMDD.log, e.g. Export20070615.log.
Note, however, that database exports may be encrypted and/or compressed, in which case export log
files are also encrypted/compressed and further file extensions, such as .mzi or .men may appear in
export log file names.
214
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Device Drivers
Log File Structures
Most log files generated by NetDVMS use a shared structure complying with the W3C Extended Log
File Format. Each log file consists of a header and a number of log lines:
•
The header outlines the information contained in the log lines.
•
The log lines consist of two main parts: the log information itself and an encrypted part.
The encrypted part makes it possible—through decryption and comparison—to assert that a
log file has not been tampered with.
Integrity Checks and Possible Error Messages
Log files are subjected to an integrity check once every 24 hours. The result of the integrity check is
automatically written to a file named according to the structure LogCheck_YYYYMMDD.log, e.g.
LogCheck_20070615.log. The log check file is by default placed in the folder containing the NetDVMS
software.
Any inconsistencies will be reported in the form of error messages written in the log check file. The
following table lists possible error messages (other, non-error, messages may also appear in the log
check file):
Error Message
Description
”Log integrity information was not found.
Log integrity can't be guaranteed.”
The log file could not be checked for integrity.
”Log information does not match integrity
information. Log integrity can't be
guaranteed.”
The log file exists, but does not contain the
expected information. Thus, log integrity cannot
be guaranteed.
”[Log file name] not found.”
The log file was not present.
”[Log file name] is empty.”
The log file was present, but empty.
”Last line changed/removed in [log file
name].”
The last line of the log file did not match
validation criteria.
”Encrypted data missing in [log file name]
near line [#].”
The encrypted part of the log line in question
was not present.
”Inconsistency found in [log file name] near
line [#].”
The log line does not match the encrypted part.
”Inconsistency found in [log file name] at
beginning of log file.”
The log file header is not correct. This situation
is most likely to occur if a user has attempted
to delete the beginning of a log file.
215
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Device Drivers
Video Device Drivers
Video drivers are small programs used for controlling/communicating with the camera devices
connected to an NetDVMS system. The Video Device Drivers should therefore be installed on your
NetDVMS system.
Video drivers are installed automatically during the initial installation of your NetDVMS system.
However, new versions of video device drivers, also called Driver Packs, are released from time to
time.
When updating your system's Video Device Drivers, it is recommended that you remove the old
version of the drivers before installing the new version.
IMPORTANT: When you remove your NetDVMS system's video device drivers, your system will not
be able to communicate with camera devices until you have installed the new version of the video
device drivers. It is therefore highly recommended that you perform the update of your Video Device
Drivers at a time when you do not expect important incidents to take place.
Removing Old Version of Video Device Drivers
To remove Video Device Drivers prior to installing a later version of the drivers, use the following
procedure on the NetDVMS server(s) on which the Video Device Drivers are installed:
1.
Open Windows' Control Panel, and select Add or Remove Programs. This will open the
Add or Remove Programs window.
2.
In the Add or Remove Programs window, select the Video Device Pack Vx.x entry
(where x.x indicates the relevant version number), and click the Remove button.
3.
You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the Video Device Drivers. Click
OK to remove the Video Device Drivers.
Installing New Version of Video Device Drivers
To begin installation of the new Video Device Drivers version, do the following:
1.
On the NetDVMS server(s) on which you want to install the new Video Device Drivers
version, shut down any running surveillance software, including any running Recording
Server service.
2.
Double-click the downloaded Video Device Driver file DeviceInstaller.exe to begin
installation.
Note: Depending on your security settings, one or more Windows security warnings
may appear after you click the link. If such security warnings appear, accept security
warnings by clicking Run or similar (exact button text depends on your browser
version).
3.
Select required language, and click OK. This will open the Video Device Driver
SetupWizard, which will guide you through the installation.
4.
On the wizard's first step, click the Next button.
216
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Video Device Drivers
5.
On the wizard's second step, an installation path is automatically suggested. Simply
click Next to continue.
6.
On the wizard's third step, select Device drivers... from the menu, and click Next.
7.
The wizard is now ready to install the video device drivers. Click the Install button to
complete the installation of the video device drivers.
8.
When ready, remember to start any stopped Recording Server service again.
217
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Daylight Saving Time
Daylight Saving Time
Daylight saving time (DST, also known as summer time) is the practice of advancing clocks in order
for evenings to have more daylight and mornings to have less. Typically, clocks are adjusted forward
one hour sometime during the spring season and adjusted backward sometime during the fall season,
hence the saying spring forward, fall back. Note that use of DST varies between countries/regions.
Clocks are adjusted forward when DST starts
When working with a surveillance system, which is inherently time-sensitive, it is important to know
how the system handles DST.
Spring: Switch from Standard Time to DST
The change from standard time to DST is not much of an issue since you jump one hour forward.
Typically, the clock jumps forward from 02:00 standard time to 03:00 DST, and the day thus has 23
hours. In that case, there is simply no data between 02:00 and 03:00 in the morning since that hour,
for that day, did not exist.
Fall: Switch from DST to Standard Time
When you switch from DST to standard time in the fall, you jump one hour back. Typically, the clock
jumps backward from 02:00 DST to 01:00 standard time, repeating that hour, and the day thus has
25 hours. In that case, you will reach 01:59:59, then immediately revert back to 01:00:00. If the
system did not react, it would essentially re-record that hour, so the first instance of, for example,
01:30 would be overwritten by the second instance of 01:30.
Because of this, NetDVMS will forcefully archive the current video in the event that the system time
changes by more than five minutes. The first instance of the 01:00 hour will not be viewable directly
from access clients (NetGuard, NetGuard-EVS and Ocularis Client Lite). However, the data is recorded
and safe, and it can be browsed using the Viewer application by opening the archived database
directly.
218
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Virus Scanning
Virus Scanning
Virus scanning on the NetDVMS server, and computers to which data is archived, should if possible be
avoided:
•
If you are using virus scanning software on the NetDVMS server, or on a computer to which
data is archived, it is likely that the virus scanning will use a considerable amount of system
resources on scanning all the data which is being archived. This may affect system
performance negatively. Also, virus scanning software may temporarily lock each file it scans,
which may further impact system performance negatively.
•
Likewise, virus scanning software on the NetDVMS server is likely to use a considerable
amount of system resources on scanning data used by the Download Manager.
If allowed in your organization, you should therefore disable any virus scanning of affected areas
(such as camera databases, etc.) on the NetDVMS server as well as on any archiving destinations.
219
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
3 GB Switching
3 GB Switching
Microsoft Windows 32-bit operating systems can address 4 GB of virtual memory. The operating
system kernel reserves 2 GB for itself, and each individual running process is allowed to address
another 2 GB. This is Windows’ default setting, and for the vast majority of NetDVMS installations it
works fine.
Since the release of NetDVMS version 6.5d , the main components of the server—the Recording
Server service and the Image Server service—have been compiled with the LARGEADDRESSAWARE
flag. This means you can optimize the memory usage of NetDVMS’s Recording Server and Image
Server services by configuring your 32-bit Windows operating system so that it restricts the kernel to
1GB of memory, leaving 3GB of address space for processes compiled with the LARGEADDRESSAWARE flag.
This should improve the stability of especially the Recording Server service by allowing it to exceed
the previous 2 GB virtual memory limit, making it possible for it to use up to 3 GB of memory. The
change in Windows configuration is known as 3 GB switching.
When Is 3 GB Switching Relevant?
For very large NetDVMS installations and/or for installations with many megapixel cameras it can be
relevant to change Windows’ settings so that only 1 GB of virtual memory is reserved for the
operating system kernel, leaving 3 GB for running processes.
If using Windows’ default setting, with only 2 GB virtual memory reserved for running processes, it
has been seen that the Recording Server service in very large installations of NetDVMS may:
•
Behave erratically if getting very close to the 2 GB virtual memory limit. Symptoms can
include database corruption, and client-server or camera-server communication errors.
•
Become unstable and crash if exceeding the 2 GB virtual memory limit,. During such crashes,
the code managing the surveillance system databases is not closed properly, and databases
will become corrupt. In case of a crash, Windows will normally restart the Recording Server
service. However, when the Recording Server service is restarted, one of its first tasks will be
to repair the databases. The database repair process can in some cases take several hours,
depending on the amount of data in the corrupted databases.
If you experience such problems, and you run NetDVMS 6.5d or newer, making Windows use 3 GB for
running processes is likely to solve the problems.
If you have not experienced such problems, but you run NetDVMS 6.5d or newer and your NetDVMS
installation is very large and/or features many megapixel cameras, 3 GB switching is likely to help
prevent the problems from occurring.
The way to configure 32-bit Windows to be LARGEADDRESSAWARE depends on your type of Windows
operating system. In the following, you will see to methods outlining Microsoft's recommended
procedure for increasing the per-process memory limit to 3 GB. Use the first method if running
Windows XP Professional or Windows Server 2003. Use the second method if running Windows 2008
Server, Windows Vista Business, Windows Vista Enterprise or Windows Vista Ultimate.
220
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
3 GB Switching
What to Do: If Running Windows XP Professional or
Windows Server 2003
IMPORTANT: Improper modification of boot.ini can render the operating system inoperable. OnSSI
does not assume any responsibility for changes you make to the operating system.
Adding the 3 GB Switch
The following technique can be used to add the 3 GB switch to the boot.ini file. From a command
prompt, enter the following to add the 3 GB switch to the end of the first line of the operating
system section in the boot.ini file (requires administrative privileges):
BOOTCFG /RAW "/3GB" /A /ID 1
Where
•
/RAW specifies the operating system options for the boot entry. The previous
operating system options will be modified.
•
"/3GB" specifies the 3 GB switch.
•
/A specifies that the operating system options entered with the /RAW switch will be
appended to the existing operating system options.
•
/ID specifies the boot entry ID in the OS Load Options section of the boot.ini file to
add the operating system options to. The boot entry ID number can be obtained by
performing the command BOOTCFG /QUERY (this displays the contents of the boot.ini
file) at the command prompt.
A reboot is required after editing the boot.ini file for the changes to take effect.
Removing the 3 GB Switch
If you want to undo the 3 GB switch mentioned above, follow this procedure:
Select Start > Control Panel, and double-click the System icon. Select the Advanced tab, and click
the Settings button in the Startup and Recovery section. Click the Edit button in the System
Startup section. The boot.ini file will launch in an editor. Remove the "/3GB" from the end of the
appropriate boot entry line under the [operating systems] section. Save and close the file. Click
OK in the Startup and Recovery section.
A reboot is required after editing the boot.ini file for the changes to take effect.
What to Do: If Running Windows 2008 Server or Windows
Vista
IMPORTANT: Improper modification of the operating system boot entry can render the operating
system inoperable. OnSSI does not assume any responsibility for changes you make to the operating
system.
Adding the 3 GB Switch
Select Start > All Programs > Accessories, right-click Command Prompt, and select Run as
administrator, then click Continue.
221
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
3 GB Switching
Enter the following command to add the 3 GB switch to the current operating system boot
entry:
BCDEDIT /SET INCREASEUSERVA 3072
Where
•
USERVA Specifies an alternate amount of user-mode virtual address space for
operating systems.
•
3072 Specifies 3 GB (3072 MB).
A reboot is required after editing the boot configuration data store for the changes to take effect.
Removing the /3GB Switch
Select Start > All Programs > Accessories, right-click Command Prompt, and select Run as
administrator, then click Continue. Enter the following command to remove the 3 GB switch from
the current operating system boot entry:
BCDEDIT /DELETEVALUE INCREASEUSERVA
A reboot is required after editing the boot configuration data store for the changes to take effect.
222
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Removal
Removal
Entire System
To remove the entire NetDVMS surveillance system (i.e. the surveillance server software and related
installation files, the video device drivers, the Download Manager, the Viewer and client software)
from your server, do the following:
What happens to our recordings? Your recordings will not be removed; they will remain on the
server even after the server software has been removed. Likewise, the NetDVMS configuration file will
remain on the server; this allows you to reuse your configuration if you later install NetDVMS again.
1.
Shut down all NetDVMS components.
2.
In Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel, and select Add or Remove Programs.
3.
In the Add or Remove Programs window's list of currently installed programs, select the
NetDVMS system entry (not the NetDVMS entry) and click the Change/Remove button.
4.
The setup wizard appears; click the Next button, then the Remove button.
5.
Select Remove entire surveillance system, then click Next, and complete the wizard's
remaining steps.
Tip: If you have used the NetPDA/NetCell Client/NetPDA/NetCell Server solution, you may also want
to remove the NetPDA/NetCell Server software from the server.
Remove Individual Components
Upon installation of NetDVMS, your surveillance system server by default contains installation files for
a number of end-user features. The installation files lets you install the end-user features on the
surveillance system server, and make them available to your organization's users through the
Download Manager.
You can remove installation files for non-required features from the surveillance system server. This
can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your organization is not going to use
certain features, for example non-relevant language versions:
1.
Open the Installers folder located in the NetDVMS installation folder.
2.
Select the required language sub-folder, then delete the unwanted installation (.exe) files.
The Download Manager is removed separately from the NetDVMS software:
3.
In Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel, and select Add or Remove Programs.
4.
In the Add or Remove Programs window's list of currently installed programs, select Download
Manager.
223
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
5.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Removal
Click the Remove button.
Note: If you are not an NetDVMS system administrator, it is highly recommended that you consult
your system administrator before removing any surveillance system-related software.
Remove NetMatrix
Prerequisites: Before removing the NetMatrix Monitor application, make sure the application is not
running. If the NetMatrix Monitor application is running, shut it down by right-clicking the NetMatrix
Monitor icon in Windows' notification area (also known as the system tray; typically located in the
bottom right corner of your screen), then selecting Exit. Note that before the application closes, you
will be prompted to specify the password required for communicating with your NetMatrix Monitor.
To remove the NetMatrix Monitor application, do the following:
1.
In Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel, and select Add or Remove Programs.
2.
In the Add or Remove Programs window's list of currently installed programs, select the
NetMatrix Monitor.
3.
Click the Remove button, and follow the removal instructions.
To remove the NetPDA/NetCell Server and NetPDA/NetCell Client software, use the following
procedures:
Note: If you are not an NetDVMS system administrator, it is highly recommended that you consult
your system administrator before removing any surveillance system-related software.
NetPDA/NetCell Server Removal Procedure
1. In Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel, and select Add or Remove Programs.
2. In the Add or Remove Programs window's list of currently installed programs, select
NetPDA/NetCell Server.
3. Click the Remove button, and follow the removal instructions.
NetPDA/NetCell Client Removal Procedure
The NetPDA/NetCell Client may be removed in two ways: either directly from the PDA, or from a PC
with ActiveSync.
Removing the NetPDA/NetCell Client Directly from the PDA
1. Tap the PDA's Start button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select the System tab.
4. Select Remove Programs.
224
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
Removal
5. Select the NetPDA/NetCell Client, and tap the Remove button.
6. Select Yes when asked if you want to remove the program.
Removing the NetPDA/NetCell Client from a PC with
ActiveSync
Note: This method requires that the NetPDA/NetCell Client was installed on the PC and transferred to
the PDA through ActiveSync.
1. Connect the PDA to the PC on which ActiveSync and the NetPDA/NetCell Client software is
installed.
2. Use Windows' Add or Remove Programs feature to remove the NetPDA/NetCell Client software.
3. When removing the NetPDA/NetCell Client software from the PC this way, ActiveSync will give
you the option of removing the NetPDA/NetCell Client software from the PDA as well (provided
the PDA is connected).
Click the Remove... button to remove the NetPDA/NetCell Client software from the PDA as
well.
225
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
How to ...
Administrator
In NetDVMS you add devices (IP video camera devices, IP video encoder devices or digital video
recorder (DVR) devices) rather than actual cameras. This is because devices have their own IP
addresses or host names. Being IP-based, NetDVMS primarily identifies units on the surveillance
system based on their IP addresses or host names.
Even though each device has its own IP address or host name, several cameras can be attached to a
single device and thus share the same IP address or host name. This is typically the case with
cameras attached to video encoder devices or DVR devices. You can of course configure and use each
camera individually, even when several cameras are attached to a single device.
In addition to camera devices, video encoder devices and DVR devices, it is possible to add a number
of dedicated I/O (input/output) devices to NetDVMS. When such I/O devices are added, they can be
used in events-based system setup in the same way as a camera. For more information about using
I/O devices, see Using Dedicated I/O Devices. For information about which I/O devices are supported,
refer to the release note.
Once a device is added in NetDVMS, any cameras attached to the device are automatically recognized
by the software, and listed in the Administrator window's Device Manager section:
Detail from the Administrator window's Device Manager section—two
devices have been added; the first device has a single camera
attached, whereas the second device has four cameras attached
To add a device, use the following procedure:
Prerequisites: You must have configured IP address, password, etc. on the device itself, as described
by the manufacturer.
1.
Open the Administrator window.
2.
In the Administrator window, click the Add Device... button. This will start the Device Setup
Wizard.
3.
On the first step of the wizard, identify the required device, either by
•
Typing the IP address of the device.
Tip: To jump to the next IP address segment in
the field, press SPACE on your keyboard.
- or -
226
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Typing the DNS host name of the device. This requires that you select the Use DNS
host names box
Specifying the IP address of a device
Note: By default, HTTP port 80 and FTP port 21 will be used for the device. If the device you
are adding uses other port numbers, click the Port Setup button and specify required port
numbers. The need for specifying different ports may often apply if the device is located
behind a NAT-enabled router or a firewall. When this is the case, also remember to configure
the router/firewall so it maps the ports and IP address used by the device.
When ready, click Next to go to the second step of the wizard.
4.
If a password is used for the device, type the password for the device's administrator account
(called the “admin” or “root” account on some devices). Leave the Autodetect Device option
selected, then click Next.
5.
When the device has been detected, type the Device License Key (DLK) for the device in the
DLK field.
Specifying DLK for the device
Tip: If you have imported DLKs (see How to Import Device License Keys), the DLK field will
already be filled with the DLK for the device.
Click Next.
6.
Assign a unique and descriptive name to the device. Upon completion of the wizard, the name
will be used when listing devices and associated cameras in the Administrator window's Device
Manager section. The name may, for example, refer to the physical location of the camera(s)
attached to the device.
227
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Assigning a name to the device
Tip: You may click the Camera Setup button to access the Camera Settings for … window,
in which you are able to specify certain settings related to camera name and PTZ control. The
latter requires that the camera is a PTZ (Pan/tilt/Zoom) camera.
7.
Click Finish.
8.
The device will be listed in the Administrator window's Device Manager section. To view a list
of cameras attached to the device, click the plus sign
next to the device name.
Tip: Cameras are listed for each device with default names, such as Camera 1, etc. If you
want to change the name of a camera, right-click the camera name in question, then select
Edit from the menu that appears.
Tip: Individual cameras listed in the Device Manager section are by default enabled,
meaning that video from the cameras are by default transferred to NetDVMS—provided that
the cameras are marked as online in the Camera/Alert Scheduler Window (also default). If
required, you can disable a camera listed in the Device Manager section by right-clicking the
name of the camera in question. See more information under Administrator window.
Generic Events
NetDVMS is able to analyze received TCP and/or UDP data packages, and automatically trigger an
event when specified criteria are met. This way you are able to easily integrate your NetDVMS
surveillance system with a very wide range of external sources, for example access control systems,
alarm systems, etc.
Events based on the analysis of received TCP and/or UDP packets are called generic events. NetDVMS
listens for generic events on the port specified as Alert Port in the Advanced window (default is port
1234).
To add a generic event, do the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, click the Generic Events... button.
This will open the Generic Events window.
2.
In the Generic Events window, first select the Generic item, then click the Add new event...
button:
228
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
This will open the Add New Event window (for specifying generic events).
3.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
•
Event name: Specify a name for the event. Note that event names must not contain
the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Event Protocol: Select which protocol NetDVMS should listen for: Any (i.e. TCP as
well as UDP), TCP only, or UDP only.
Which port is used? NetDVMS listens for generic events on the port specified as
Alert Port in the Advanced window (default is port 1234).
•
Event rule type: Select how particular NetDVMS should be when analyzing received
data packages: Match if the received package must contain only the exact message
specified in the Event message include field (see description in the following), Search
if the received package must contain the message specified in the Event message
include field, but may also have other content.
•
Event priority: Specify a priority between 0 (lowest priority) and 1000 (highest
priority) for the event, in case a received data package matches more than one
event.
•
Event rule string: Specify what NetDVMS should look out for when analyzing the
data packages, then click the Add button to add the specified term(s) to the Event
message include field, the content of which is used when analyzing received data
packages. You are furthermore able to use processing order parentheses and two
different Boolean operators in the Event message include field by clicking the buttons
229
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
to the right of the field.
•
(Optional) If requiring an e-mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs,
select the Send Email if this event occurs check box. Note that in order to be able to
use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup
window. If requiring an image (recorded at the time of the event) to be included in
the e-mail alert, also check the Include image from camera check box and select the
required camera in the list next to the check box.
•
(Optional) If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent
automatically when the event occurs, select the Send SMS if this event occurs check
box. Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature must have
been set up in the SMS settings window.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the Generic Events window.
4.
In the Generic Events window, your newly defined event is now listed (you may have to click
the expand icon in front of the Generic item to see the listing):
Click OK to close the Generic Event window and return to the Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the generic event will
now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
Tip: See also How to Test a Generic Event.
Output (e.g. lights, sirens, etc.) connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered manually
when viewing live video in NetGuard, Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard-EVS.
•
In an OnSSI client, output may be triggered by selecting the required output from a list on the
client's Live tab.
The output does not necessarily have to be physically connected to the specific camera from which a
NetGuard/Ocularis Client Lite/NetGuard-EVS user views live video; the output can be connected to any
device on your NetDVMS system.
To add an output for manual control, do the following:
Note: In the following, it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output
port on the required camera or other device, but that it has not yet been defined on your NetDVMS
system. If you have already defined the output on your system, begin at step 5.
1.
In the Administrator window, click the I/O Setup button.
This will open the I/O Setup window.
230
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
2.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
In the I/O Setup window, first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is
connected, then click the Add new output event... button:
This will open the Add New Output window.
3.
In the Add New Output window, the External output connected to field will show the name of
the selected camera or other device.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Output connected on: Select the camera/device output port on which the output
unit is connected. Many cameras/devices only have a single output port; in that case
simply select Output 1.
•
Keep output for: Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active
when triggered, in either 1/10 seconds or seconds.
Note: Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time, for
example max. five seconds. Refer to the documentation for the device in question for
exact information.
•
External output name: Specify a name for the output. The name will appear on the
button/list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output. Note that
output names must not contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
In the following example, we have specified that a siren connected on a camera's Output 1
port should sound for five seconds when triggered:
Tip: You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the I/O Setup window.
4.
In the I/O Setup window, your newly defined output is now listed (you may have to click the
expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing):
231
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Click OK to close the I/O setup window and return to the Administrator window.
5.
In the Administrator window, first select the camera for which the output should be available,
then click the Settings... button.
This will open the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
6.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click the Outputs...
button:
This will open the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
7.
In the All Outputs list in the window's left side, select the required output, then click the >>
button located between the All Outputs list and the On Manual Control list:
232
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
This will copy the selected output to the On Manual Control list, which lists all outputs
available for manual control when viewing live video from the camera in question.
Good to know:
•
You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself. If output has
been defined on other cameras/devices on the NetDVMS system, this output will also
be selectable in the All Outputs list.
•
An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way.
•
If you have specified several outputs in the On Manual Control list, you are able to
control the sequence in which the outputs will be displayed in the OnSSI client. By
using the up and down buttons located to the right of the list, you can change a
selected output's position in the sequence.
•
The Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window also lets you select
output for automatic triggering on detected motion. This is further described in How to
Add a Motion-Triggered Output.
8.
When ready, click the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window's Exit
button to return to the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
9.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click OK to return to the
Administrator window.
10. Close the Administrator.
The defined output will now be available in the NetGuard/NetGuard-EVS, as described in the
beginning of this text.
Note that individual users' rights may prevent them from accessing specific cameras and/or
output in NetGuard and NetGuard-EVS; such rights are defined through the Image Server
Administrator window.
Output (e.g. lights, sirens, etc.) connected to cameras or other devices can be triggered automatically
when motion is detected by a camera. The output does not necessarily have to be physically
connected to the motion-detecting camera.
To add a motion-triggered output, do the following:
233
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Note: The following describes one way of adding a motion-triggered output, namely through the
Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window. Alternatively, motion-triggered output
may be based on VMD events or—if a device has its own motion detection capabilities—on input
events. Once such VMD or input events have been added, they can be tied to output through the I/O
Control window.
Note: In the following, it is assumed that the required output unit has been connected to the output
port on the required camera or other device, but that it has not yet been defined on your NetDVMS
system. If you have already defined the output on your system, begin at step 5.
1.
In the Administrator window, click the I/O Setup button.
This will open the I/O Setup window.
2.
In the I/O Setup window, first select the camera or other device to which the output unit is
connected, then click the Add new output event... button:
This will open the Add New Output window.
3.
In the Add New Output window, the External output connected to field will show the name of
the selected camera or other device.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Output connected on: Select the camera/device output port on which the output
unit is connected. Many cameras/devices only have a single output port; in that case
simply select Output 1.
•
Keep output for: Specify the amount of time for which the output should be active
when triggered, in either 1/10 seconds or seconds.
Note: Some devices are only able to apply outputs for a relatively short time, for
example max. five seconds. Refer to the documentation for the device in question for
exact information.
•
External output name: Specify a name for the output. The name will appear on the
button/list with which users will be able to manually trigger the output. Note that
output names must not contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
In the following example, we have specified that a siren connected on a camera's Output 1
port should sound for five seconds when triggered:
234
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Tip: You are able to test the output by clicking the Test Output button.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the I/O Setup window.
4.
In the I/O Setup window, your newly defined output is now listed (you may have to click the
expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing):
Click OK to close the I/O setup window and return to the Administrator window.
5.
In the Administrator window, first select the camera for which the output should be available,
then click the Settings... button.
This will open the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
6.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click the Outputs...
button:
235
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
This will open the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
7.
In the All Outputs list in the window's left side, select the required output, then click the >>
button located between the All Outputs list and the On Motion Detected list:
This will copy the selected output to the On Motion Detected list, which lists all outputs to be
automatically triggered when motion is detected by the camera..
Good to know:
8.
•
You are not limited to selecting output connected to the camera itself. If output has
been defined on other cameras/devices on the NetDVMS system, this output will also
be selectable in the All Outputs list.
•
An unlimited number of outputs may be selected this way.
•
The Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window also lets you select
output for manual triggering in an OnSSI client. This is further described in How to
Add a Manually Controlled Output.
When ready, click the Output Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window's Exit
button to return to the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
236
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
9.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click OK to return to the
Administrator window.
10. Close the Administrator.
The defined output will now be triggered automatically when motion is detected by the
selected camera.
Note that the automatic output triggering will be controlled entirely by your motion detection
settings for the camera in question. See the description of the Adjust Motion Detection window
for more information.
Timer events are separate events, triggered by the input event, VMD event, generic event or event
button under which they are defined. Timer events occur a specified number of seconds or minutes
after the event under which they are defined has occurred or the event button under which they have
been defined has been clicked.
Timer events may be used for a wide variety of purposes; the following are examples only:
•
A camera starts recording based on an input event, e.g. when a door is opened; a timer event
stops the recording after 15 seconds
•
Lights are switched on and a camera starts recording based on a VMD event, i.e. when motion
is detected; a timer event stops the recording after one minute, and another timer event
switches the lights off after two minutes
To define a timer event, do the following:
1.
2.
A timer event requires that an input event, VMD event, generic event or event button has
already been defined. Begin by selecting the required event or event button:
•
If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Input or VMD Event: Click
the Administrator window's I/O Setup... button to open the I/O Setup window: In the
I/O Setup window's Defined events list, click the plus sign ( ) next to the required
device, select the required input or VMD event, then click the Add new event... button
to open the New Timer window.
•
If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Event Button: Click the
Administrator window's Event Buttons... button to open the Event Buttons window: In
the Event Buttons window's Defined Events list, select the required event button, then
click the Add new event... button to open the New Timer window.
•
If Adding the Timer Event under an Already Defined Generic Event: Click the
Administrator window's Generic Events... button to open the Generic Events window:
In the Generic Events window's Defined Events list, select the required generic event,
then click the Add new event... button to open the New Timer window.
In the New Timer window, the Timer event is started by field will show the name of the
selected event or event button.
237
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Timer event name: Specify a name for the timer event. Note that event names must
not contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
•
Timer event occurs after: Specify the amount of time that should pass between the
event occurring/event button being clicked and the timer event, in either seconds or
minutes.
When ready, click OK.
3.
In the window from which you opened the New Timer window, your newly defined timer event
will now be listed:
Timer event (in this example associated with a
VMD event) listed in I/O Setup window. You may
have to click the expand icon
in front of the
name of the required device as well as the
required main event to see the timer event.
Timer event (associated with an event button)
listed in Event Buttons window. You may have to
click the expand icon
in front of the name of
the required device as well as the required main
event to see the timer event.
Timer event (associated with a generic event)
listed in Generic Events window. You may have
to click the expand icon
in front of the word
Generic as well as the required main event to
see the timer event.
Click OK to return to the Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the timer event will now
be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS, such as starting or stopping
recording on cameras, triggering e-mail or SMS notifications, making PTZ cameras move to specific
preset positions, activating output, etc. An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously.
238
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Tip: If you are specifically looking for information about how to configure motion detectiontriggered activation of an output device only (such as a siren, a strobe light, etc.), see How to Add a
Motion-Triggered Output.
Several types of events exist (see About Input, Events & Output ...). In the following, you will see how
to define an event based on NetDVMS detecting motion on a particular camera (VMD simply means
Video Motion Detection). Once the VMD event is defined, you will be able to select it when further
configuring NetDVMS.
Note: In addition to NetDVMS's motion detection, some devices also have their own capabilities for
detecting motion (configured in the devices' own software; typically by accessing a browser-based
configuration interface on the device's IP address). Events based on motion detected on a device itself
are not VMD Events; they are input events, since they are based on input from the device.
Note: Your motion detection settings for the camera in question will entirely determine when motion
is detected, and thus when the VMD event will occur. See the description of the Adjust Motion
Detection window for more information. Also note that in order not to generate an excessively high
number of VMD events during periods with lots of motion, a VMD event cannot occur more frequently
than every five seconds.
To add a VMD event, do the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, click the I/O Setup button.
This will open the I/O Setup window.
2.
In the I/O Setup window, first select the device on which motion must be detected in order for
the event to occur, then click the Add VMD Event (Motion Detection) button:
This will automatically add a VMD event to the selected device (unless the selected device is a
video encoder, see below).
o
If the selected device is a video encoder, several cameras may be attached to the
device, and a separate dialog will prompt you to select the required camera:
239
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
When ready, click OK.
3.
In the I/O Setup window, your newly defined VMD event will now be listed (you may have to
click the expand icon in front of the name of the device to see the listing):
Click OK to close the I/O Setup window and return to the Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the VMD event will now
be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
Tip: For video encoder devices, you are able to define a VMD event for each connected
camera; simply repeat above process.
Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS, such as starting or stopping
recording on cameras, triggering e-mail or SMS notifications, making PTZ cameras move to specific
preset positions, activating output, etc. An event may also trigger several actions simultaneously.
Several types of events exist (see About Input, Events & Output ...). In most cases, events occur and
actions are triggered without the need for human intervention by NetDVMS users: System
administrators define the criteria for each event, for example a certain amount of detected motion or
input from a specific sensor; when the criteria are met, the system interprets it as an event, and
automatically triggers the required actions.
However, you may also want users to be able to manually force an event to occur. For this purpose,
NetDVMS lets you define event buttons. Event buttons let users manually trigger events from
NetGuard-EVS. In NetGuard-EVS, event buttons are actually not buttons; instead users manually
trigger events by selecting them from a list. See also About Event Buttons for examples of the many
ways in which you can use event buttons.
To add an event button, do the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, click the Event Buttons... button.
This will open the Event Buttons window.
2.
In the Event Buttons window, first select the camera or other device for which you want the
event button to be available, then click the Add new event... button.
Note that you are also able to make the event button globally available (i.e. available to users
regardless of which camera/device they have selected in NetGuard-EVS. To make the event
button globally available, simply select Global (at the top of the list) instead of a particular
camera/device.
240
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
This will open the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons).
3.
In the Add New Event window (for adding event buttons), the Button related to field will show
the name of the selected camera or other device. If you are adding a globally available event
button, the field will display Global.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Manual event name: Specify a name for the event button. Note that event names
must not contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
•
(Optional) If requiring an e-mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs,
select the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box. Note that in order to be able to
use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup
window. If requiring an image (recorded at the time of the event) to be included in
the e-mail alert, also check the Include image from camera check box and select the
required camera in the list next to the check box.
•
(Optional) If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent
automatically when the event occurs, select the Send SMS if this event occurs check
box. Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature must have
been set up in the SMS settings window.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the Event buttons window.
4.
In the Event Buttons window, your newly defined event button is now listed (you may have to
click the expand icon in front of the name of camera or other device to see the listing):
241
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Click OK to close the Event Buttons window and return to the Administrator window.
The defined event button will now be available in the NetGuard-EVS, as described in the
beginning of this text. Note that individual users' rights may them from accessing specific
cameras and/or events in NetGuard-EVS; such rights are defined through the Image Server
Administrator window.
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the event button will
now be selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
Events can be used for automatically triggering actions in NetDVMS, such as starting or stopping
recording on cameras, triggering e-mail or SMS notifications, making PTZ cameras move to specific
preset positions, activating output, etc.
Several types of events exist (see About Input, Events & Output ...). In the following you will see how
to define events based on input received from external input units—such as sensors attached to doors,
windows, etc.—connected to cameras or other devices on a NetDVMS system.
To add an input-based event, do the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, click the I/O Setup button.
This will open the I/O Setup window.
2.
In the I/O Setup window, first select the camera or other device to which the input unit is
connected, then click the Add new event... button:
This will open the Add New Event window.
Note: Some cameras/devices are capable of handling one input event only; others are
capable of handling several input events. The content of the Add New Event window varies
accordingly. For simplicity reasons, the following steps will describe adding an event on a
camera/device capable of handling one input event only.
242
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
3.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
In the Add New Event window (for devices capable of handling one input event only), the
External sensor connected to field will show the name of the selected camera or other device.
Now specify information in the following fields:
•
Sensor connected through: Select the camera/device input port on which the input
unit is connected. Some cameras/devices only have a single input port; in that case
simply select Input 1.
•
Event occurs when input goes: Select whether the input event should be triggered
when the signal on the input sensor rises (High) or falls (Low).
•
External event name: Specify a name for the event. Note that event names must not
contain the following characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
•
(Optional) If requiring an e-mail alert to be sent automatically when the event occurs,
select the Send e-mail if this event occurs check box. Note that in order to be able to
use e-mail alerts, the e-mail alert feature must have been set up in the E-Mail setup
window. If requiring an image (recorded at the time of the event) to be included in
the e-mail alert, also check the Include image from camera check box and select the
required camera in the list next to the check box.
•
(Optional) If requiring an SMS mobile phone text message alert to be sent
automatically when the event occurs, select the Send SMS if this event occurs check
box. Note that in order to be able to use SMS alerts, the SMS alert feature must have
been set up in the SMS settings window.
When ready, click OK. This will return you to the I/O Setup window.
4.
In the I/O Setup window, your newly defined event is now listed (you may have to click the
expand icon in front of the name of the camera or other device to see the listing):
Click OK to close the I/O setup window and return to the Administrator window.
243
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
For system administrators defining actions to be triggered by events, the event will now be
selectable in line with other events defined on NetDVMS.
NetMatrix allows distributed viewing of live video from any camera on any monitor on a network
operating with NetDVMS.
Access: You access the NetMatrix Configuration window by clicking the NetMatrix... button in the
Administrator window.
The NetMatrix Configuration window has two tabs; the Config tab lets you define individual computers
on which it should be possible to view NetMatrix-triggered content (such computers are known as
NetMatrix recipients), the Event tab lets you define which events should trigger which actions in
individual NetMatrix recipients:
Config Tab
The Config tab is used for enabling NetMatrix functionality and for defining which computers to
display NetMatrix-triggered live video on.
A computer on which NetMatrix-triggered video can be displayed is known as a NetMatrix
recipient. Being able to view NetMatrix-triggered video requires that either a NetGuard-EVS or
the dedicated NetMatrix Monitor software is installed on the user's computer.
Tip: See the minimum system requirements for using the NetMatrix Monitor software under
System Requirements.
244
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
The Config tab contains the following fields, check boxes and buttons:
Field, Check
Box, Button
Description
Enable
NetMatrix
Select check box to enable NetMatrix functionality.
[List of
Defined
NetMatrix
recipients]
Lists any already defined NetMatrix recipients, i.e. computers on
which NetMatrix-triggered video can be displayed.
To change the properties of an already defined NetMatrix recipient,
select the required NetMatrix recipient, make the changes in the
fields below the list, then click the Update button.
To remove a NetMatrix recipient from the list, select the unwanted
NetMatrix recipient, then click the Delete button. You will be
prompted to confirm the removal.
Delete
Available only when you have selected a NetMatrix recipient in the
list.
Clicking the Delete button will remove the selected NetMatrix
recipient. You will be prompted to confirm the removal.
Name
Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the
properties of an existing one.
Type a name for the NetMatrix recipient. The name will appear in
various day-to-day usage situations; it is therefore a good idea to
use a descriptive and unambiguous name.
Note: NetMatrix recipient names must not contain the following
characters: < > & ' " \ / : * ? | [ ]
Address
Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the
properties of an existing one.
Specify the IP address of the NetMatrix recipient.
Tip: To jump to the next IP address segment in the field, press
SPACE on your keyboard.
Port
Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the
properties of an existing one.
Specify the port number to be used when sending commands to the
NetMatrix recipient. The NetMatrix recipient will listen for commands
on this port.
By default, port 12345 is used. You are of course able to specify
245
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
Field, Check
Box, Button
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Description
another port number.
Password
Used when adding a new NetMatrix recipient or editing the
properties of an existing one.
Specify the password to be used when communicating with the
NetMatrix recipient.
NetGuardEVS
NetMatrix-triggered live video may also be displayed in NetDVMS
users' Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS. If Ocularis Client Lite or
NetGuard-EVS is used, distribution of the NetMatrix-triggered live
video takes place slightly differently.
Select check box if the NetMatrix recipient in question is using
Ocularis Client Lite or NetGuard-EVS.
Clear
Removes any content in the Name, Address, Port, Password and
NetGuard-EVS fields.
Update
Available only if you have edited the properties of an existing
NetMatrix recipient.
Updates the properties of the selected NetMatrix recipient with the
changes made during editing.
Add
Available only if you have added properties of a new NetMatrix
recipient in the Name, Address, Port, Password, and possibly
NetGuard-EVS fields.
Adds the new NetMatrix recipient to the list.
Event Tab
There are two ways in which NetMatrix-triggered video can appear in a NetMatrix recipient:
•
Another user wants to share important video, and sends it to the required NetMatrix
recipient from a NetGuard-EVS, or from a custom-made web page
•
Video is sent to the required NetMatrix recipient automatically when a predefined
event occurs
The Event tab is used for configuring the automatic sending of live video based on predefined
events; it lets you define exactly which events and cameras to use. You define this on a perNetMatrix recipient basis.
To define what should happen on which NetMatrix recipient when an event occurs, do the
following:
246
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
1.
Select the required NetMatrix recipient.
2.
Right-click the NetMatrix recipient to select the required event:
In this example, the selected event is detected motion on a particular camera. Note
that, if available, you are also able to select other types of event, including input
events, generic events, VMD events, event buttons (including global event buttons)
and timer events.
When you select an event, it will initially be highlighted by a red exclamation mark:
The exclamation mark indicates that there is additional configuration to be done.
3.
Now right-click the event to select which action should take place when the event
occurs:
You have three actions to choose from:
•
Connect: Connect to the camera (you will specify the actual camera in the
next step)
•
Disconnect, then connect: Disconnect any existing connection to the camera
(you will specify the actual camera in the next step), then connect again.
This option is useful because NetMatrix recipients are often able to show live
video from more than one event, in which case the live video will appear in the
NetMatrix recipient on a first-in-first-out basis. Each time a new event occurs,
video from the latest event is displayed prominently in a specific position on
the NetMatrix recipient, while at the same time video from the older events is
shifted to less prominent positions and eventually ”pushed out” of the
NetMatrix recipient in order to make space for the latest event's video.
With the Connect option, you may thus experience that if video triggered by
one event on a camera is already shown on the NetMatrix recipient, videos
triggered by another event on the same camera would not be displayed
prominently as coming from the latest event – simply because the NetMatrix
recipient is already showing video from the camera in a less prominent
position.
By selecting Disconnect, then connect you can avoid this issue, and ensure
that video from the latest event is always displayed prominently.
247
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Disconnect: Disconnect the camera (you will specify the actual camera in the
next step). Use if a particular event should cause video from a particular
camera to stop being displayed in the NetMatrix recipient, even if they are not
yet old enough to be ”pushed out” of the NetMatrix recipient.
When you have selected an action, another red exclamation mark will indicate that
there is still some configuration to be done:
4.
Right-click the action to select which camera to apply the action on:
In this example, we have specified that when motion is detected on Camera b, the
selected NetMatrix recipient should connect to Camera b:
5. Repeat as required. Bear in mind that you define events and actions for a single
NetMatrix recipient at a time.
You must have a Device License Key (DLK) for every device (IP network camera or IP video server)
installed on your NetDVMS surveillance system.
Remember that you are allowed to install and use only the number of cameras listed on your
organization's license sheet; regardless of you number of available DLKs. For example, a fully used
four-port video encoder counts as four cameras even though the cameras are connected through a
single device—therefore a fully used four-port video encoder will use four licenses.
System administrators obtain DLKs as part of the software registration process.
You are able to specify each DLK manually when adding a device through the Device Setup Wizard,
available by clicking the Add Device... button in the Administrator window. However, you can avoid
having to specify each DLK manually by using the following procedure to import all received DLKs into
NetDVMS in one go:
Prerequisites: The DLKs, received in a .dlk file, must have been saved at a location accessible by the
surveillance server, for example on a network drive or on a USB stick.
1.
Open the Administrator window.
2.
In the Administrator window, click the Import DLKs... button.
3.
Browse to the location at which you have saved the received .dlk file.
Select the file, and click Open.
248
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
All DLKs are now automatically imported, and the relevant DLK will automatically appear when
you add a device through the Device Setup Wizard.
Once you have added a generic event (see How to Add a Generic Event), a quick and easy way to test
your generic event is to first set up an event notification and then use Telnet to send a small amount
of data which will trigger the generic event and in turn the event notification.
What is Telnet? Telnet is a terminal emulation program used on TCP/IP networks. With Telnet,
you can connect to a server from a computer on the network, and execute commands through Telnet
as if you were entering them directly on the server. Windows includes a client for use with Telnet.
For this example, we have created a generic event called Video. Our generic event simply specifies
that if the term video appears in a received TCP data package, the generic event should be triggered.
Your generic event may be different, but you can still use the principles outlined in the following:
1.
In the Administrator window, first select a camera from which you are able to view video in a
NetGuard/NetGuard-EVS, then click the Settings button.
This will open the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window.
2.
In the Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window, click the Event
Notifications... button:
This will open the Setup Notifications on Events window.
3.
In the Setup Notifications on Events window's Available Events list, expand the Generic item
and select your generic event. Then click the >> button to move the selected generic event to
the Active Events list:
249
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Note: Make sure that your generic event is the only event appearing in the Active Events list
while you are performing the test, otherwise you cannot be sure that it is your generic event
which triggers the event notification. Once you are done testing, you can move any
temporarily removed events back to the Active Events list.
4.
Click OK in the Setup Notifications on Events window, click OK in the Camera Settings for
[Device Name] [Camera Name] window, then click the Exit button in the Administrator
window.
5.
Make sure NetDVMS's recording server service. Also make sure that the camera for which you
configured the event notification is displayed in your NetGuard or NetGuard-EVS.
6.
In Windows' Start menu, select Run..., and type the following in the Open field:
•
If you are performing the test on the NetDVMS server itself:
telnet localhost 1234
•
If you are performing the test from a remote computer: Substitute localhost
with the IP address of the NetDVMS server. Example: If the IP address of the
NetDVMS server is 123.123.123.123, type:
telnet 123.123.123.123 1234
Note: In the above examples, the number 1234 indicates the port on which the NetDVMS
server listens for generic events. Port 1234 is the default port for this purpose, but it is
possible to change this by specifying another port number in the Advanced window's Alert
Port field. If the alert port number has been changed on your system, type your system's
alert port number instead of 1234.
This will open a Telnet window.
7.
In the Telnet window, type the term (so-called event substring) required to trigger your
generic event. In our case, the required term is video:
250
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
While typing in the Telnet window, you may experience so-called echo. This is simply the
server repeating some or all of the characters it receives; it will not have any impact as long
as you are sure you type the required characters.
8.
Close the Telnet window by clicking the close button in its top right corner:
9.
Go to your NetGuard or NetGuard-EVS. If the yellow event notification indicator lights up for
the required camera, your generic event works as intended.
Databases
In the Administrator application's Camera Settings for [Device Name] [Camera Name] window you are
able to select which action to take if a camera database becomes corrupted. The actions include
several database repair options.
While being able to select such actions is highly valuable, it is of course even better to take steps to
ensure that your camera databases do not become corrupted:
Power Outages: Use a UPS
The single biggest reason for corrupt databases is the surveillance system server being shut down
abruptly, without files being saved and without the operating system being closed down properly. This
may happen due to power outages, due to somebody accidentally pulling out the server's power cable,
or similar.
The best way of protecting your surveillance system server from being shut down abruptly is to equip
your surveillance system server with a UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply).
The UPS works as a battery-driven secondary power source, providing the necessary power for saving
open files and safely powering down your system in the event of power irregularities. UPSs vary in
sophistication, but many UPSs include software for automatically saving open files, for alerting system
administrators, etc.
Selecting the right type of UPS for your organization's environment is an individual process. When
assessing your needs, however, do bear in mind the amount of runtime you will require the UPS to be
able to provide if the power fails; saving open files and shutting down an operating system properly
may take several minutes.
Windows Task Manager: Be Careful when Ending Processes
251
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
When working in Windows Task Manager, be careful not to end any processes which affect the
surveillance system. If you end an application or system service by clicking End Process in the
Windows Task Manager, the process in question will not be given the chance to save its state or data
before it is terminated. This may in turn lead to corrupt camera databases.
Windows Task Manager will typically display a warning if you attempt to end a process. Unless you are
absolutely sure that ending the process will not affect the surveillance system, make sure you click the
No button when the warning message asks you if you really want to terminate the process.
Hard Disk Failure: Protect Your Drives
Hard disk drives are mechanical devices, and as such they are vulnerable to external factors. The
following are examples of external factors which may damage hard disk drives and lead to corrupt
camera databases:
•
Vibration (make sure the surveillance system server and its surroundings are stable)
•
Strong heat (make sure the server has adequate ventilation)
•
Strong magnetic fields (avoid)
•
Power outages (make sure you use a UPS; see more information in the previous)
•
Static electricity (make sure you ground yourself if you are going to handle a hard disk
drive).
•
Fire, water, etc. (avoid)
Removing the Download Manager
The Download Manager is removed separately from the NetDVMS software:
1.
In Windows' Start menu, select Control Panel, and select Add or Remove Programs.
2.
In the Add or Remove Programs window's list of currently installed programs, select Download
Manager.
3.
Click the Remove button.
The Download Manager lets you manage which NetDVMS-related features your organization's users
will be able to access from a targeted welcome page on the surveillance system server.
Access: You access the Download Manager from Windows' Start menu: Select All Programs > NVR
Download Manager > NVR Download Manager.
Examples of User-Accessible Features
•
With a standard browser, users connect to the surveillance server where they are
presented with a welcome page. From the welcome page, users can download OnSSI
client software and install it on their computers.
252
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
•
Language packs, which let users add additional language versions to their existing
clients. Users download such language packs from the welcome page.
•
Users can connect to welcome page and log in to NetGuard, which simply runs in a
browser without any need for software installation.
•
Various plugins. Downloading such plugins can be relevant for users if your
organization uses add-on products with NetDVMS.
What Does the Welcome Page Look Like?
The welcome page is a simple web page with links to downloading or running various features.
To view the welcome page, simply open an Internet Explorer browser (version 6.0 or later) and
connect to the following address:
http://[surveillance server IP address or hostname]
If the Image Server has been configured with a port number other than the default port 80, you must
specify the port number as well, separated from the IP address or hostname by a colon:
http://[surveillance server IP address or hostname]:[port number]
The content of the welcome page is managed through the Download Manager; therefore the welcome
page will often look different across organizations.
Initial Look
Immediately after you install NetDVMS, the welcome page will provide access to two features:
Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard Clients.
This initial look of the welcome page is automatically provided through the Download Manager's
default configuration—for more information, see Default Configuration of Download Manager in the
following.
Default Configuration of Download Manager
The Download Manager has a default configuration. This ensures that your organization's users can
access standard features without the surveillance system administrator having to set up anything.
The default configuration provides users with access to two features: Ocularis Client Lite and NetGuard
clients in language versions matching the language version of your NetDVMS system.
253
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
The Download Manager's configuration is represented in a tree structure. Example: With an English
version of NetDVMS, the Download Manager's default configuration would be represented in a tree
structure like this.
Download Manager's Tree Structure Explained
•
The first level of the tree structure simply indicates that you are working with
NetDVMS.
•
The second level refers to the languages in which the page is available. In the
example, the page is available in English, French, Chinese and Spanish.
•
The third level refers to the features which are—or can be made—available to users.
In the example, these features are limited to NetGuard-EVS and NetGuard.
•
The fourth level refers to particular versions of each feature, such as version 4.5e,
which are—or can be made—available to users.
•
The fifth level refers to the language versions of the features which are—or can be
made—available to users. In the example, only English versions are initially listed. This
is because the example is from an English version of NetDVMS; had you installed a
Japanese version, only Japanese versions would initially be listed.
In the example, NetDVMS has been installed an English-language version.
The fact that only standard features are initially available—and only in the same language version as
the surveillance system itself—helps reduce installation time and save space on the server. There is
254
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
simply no need to have a feature or language version available on the server if nobody is going to use
it.
You can, however, easily make more features and/or languages available as required. See Making
New Features Available in the following for more information.
Making New Features Available
Making new features—including new language versions—available to your organization's users
involves two procedures: First you install the required features on the surveillance system server. You
then use the Download Manager to fine-tune which features should be available in the various
language versions of the welcome page.
Installing New Features on Server
If the Download Manager is open, close it before installing new features on the server.
Installation files for NetGuard-EVS language versions, language packs, etc. are by default available on
your surveillance system server in a folder called Installers. The Installers folder is located in the
NetDVMS installation folder.
To install a feature from the Installers folder, select the required language sub-folder, then doubleclick the required installation (.exe) file.
Tip: You can find more language versions of the NetGuard-EVS installer—and additional language
packs—on the NetDVMS software DVD.
When a new feature has been installed on the surveillance system server, you will see a confirmation
dialog. If required, you can open the Download Manager from the dialog.
Making New Features Available through the Download
Manager
When you have installed new features—such as NetGuard-EVS language versions, language packs,
etc.—they will by default be selected in the Download Manager, and thus immediately be available to
users via the welcome page.
You can always show or hide features on the welcome page by selecting or clearing check boxes in the
Download Manager's tree structure.
Tip: You can change the sequence in which features and languages are displayed on the welcome
page: In the Download manager's tree structure, simply drag items and drop them at the required
position.
Hiding and Removing Features
You can remove features in several ways:
•
You can hide features from the welcome page by clearing check boxes in the
Download Manager's tree structure. In that case, the features will still be installed on
the surveillance system server, and by selecting check boxes in the Download
Manager's tree structure you can quickly make the features available again.
255
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
•
•
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
You can remove features which have previously been made available through the
Download Manager. This will remove the installation of the features on the surveillance
system server. The features will disappear from the Download Manager, but
installation files for the features will be kept in the surveillance system server's
Installers folder, so you can re-install them later if required.
•
In the Download Manager, click the Remove features... button.
•
In the Remove Features window, select the features you want to remove.
•
Click OK. You will be asked to confirm that you want to remove the selected
features. If you are sure, click the Yes button.
You can remove installation files for non-required features from the surveillance
system server. This can help you save disk space on the server if you know that your
organization is not going to use certain features—typically non-relevant language
versions. See Removing Installation files for End-User Features for more information.
Virus Scanning Information
If you are using virus scanning software on the NetDVMS server, it is likely that the virus scanning will
use a considerable amount of system resources on scanning data from the Download Manager. If
allowed in your organization, disable virus scanning on all or parts of the NetDVMS server. For more
information see Virus Scanning Information.
Help System
To use NetDVMS's built-in help system, simply press the F1 key on your keyboard while using
NetDVMS.
When you press F1, the help system will open in a separate window, allowing you to easily switch
between help and NetDVMS itself.
The help system in is context sensitive. This means that when you press F1 for help while working in a
particular NetDVMS window, the help system automatically displays the help topic describing that
window.
Navigating the Built-in Help System
Even though the help system initially takes you to a topic describing the window you are working in,
you are always able to freely navigate between the help system's contents. To do this, simply use the
help window's three tabs: Contents, Search and Glossary, or use the links inside the help topics.
Contents Tab
The Contents tab lets you navigate the help system based on a tree structure. Many users
will be familiar with this type of navigation from, for example, Windows Explorer.
Search Tab
256
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
The Search tab lets you search for help topics containing particular terms of interest. For
example, you can search for the term camera, and every help topic containing the term
camera will be listed in the search results. Clicking a help topic title in the search results list
will open the required topic. The Search tab contains a number of advanced search features;
among these are the ability to quickly select and run previous searches, the ability to search
topic titles only as well as the ability to display search results ranked according to presumed
relevance.
Links in Help Topics
The actual content of each help topic is displayed in the right pane of the help window. Help topic
texts may contain various types of links, notably so-called expanding drop-down links.
Clicking an expanding drop-down link will display detailed information. The detailed information will be
displayed immediately below the link itself; the content on the page simply expands. Expanding dropdown links thus help save space.
If you wish to quickly collapse all texts from expanding drop-down links in a help topic, simply click
the title of the topic on the help system's Contents tab.
Printing Help Topics
To print a help topic, navigate to the required topic and click the help window's Print button. When you
click the Print button, a dialog box may ask you whether you wish to print the selected topic only or all
topics under the selected heading. When this is the case, select Print the selected topic and click OK.
Tip: When printing a selected help topic, the topic will be printed as you see it on your screen.
Therefore, if a topic contains expanding drop-down links (see Links in Help Topics above), click each
required drop-down link to display the text in order for it to be included in your printout. This allows
you to create targeted printouts, containing exactly the amount of information you require.
Image Server
The Image Server Administrator's Slave Administration window lets you define all servers required to
run as slave servers under the NetDVMS server you are configuring.
Remember that only one server can be the master server. Any number of servers can be defined as
slave servers under the master server.
257
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Access: You access the Slave Administration window by clicking the Slaves... button in the Image
Server Administrator window.
Adding a Slave Server
To add a slave server, click the Slave Administration window's Add Slave... button, specify the host
name of the slave server, specify the required port number, and click OK. This will add the slave
server to the Slave Administration window's list of slave servers.
Tip: Instead of specifying a host name when adding a slave server, you may specify the IP address
of the slave server. Simply type the IP address in the Hostname field when adding the slave server.
Remember that if on a local network, the local IP address of the slave server must be used.
Before you start using your master/slave setup, remember to verify that:
•
Required users have be defined on the master server as well as on each of the slave servers.
•
Outside Access has been enabled on all involved servers, and ports mapped accordingly in the
routers or firewalls used, if the slave servers are to be accessed from the internet.
Removing a Slave Server
To remove a slave server from the Slave Administration window's list of slave servers, select the slave
server in the list and click the Delete Slave button.
The Define local IP ranges window lets you define IP address ranges which the Image Server should recognize as
coming from a local network.
Access: You access the Define local IP ranges window by clicking the Local IP Ranges... button in
the Image Server Administrator window.
To define a local IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window, do the following:
1.
Specify the beginning of the IP address range in the Define local IP ranges window's first field,
and the end of the IP address range in the second field.
2.
Click the Add button. The IP address range will be added to the list in the lower part of the
Define local IP ranges window.
You may define as many local IP address ranges as required. If required, an IP address range
may include only one IP address (example: 192.168.10.1-192.168.10.1).
3.
When ready, click the Define local IP ranges window's Close button to return to the Image
Server Administrator window.
258
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
Tip: There is no feature for editing an already defined IP address range in the Define local IP ranges
window. However, you can simply select the range in question in the Define local IP ranges window's
list, delete it by clicking the Delete button, and then simply add a new range reflecting your
requirements.
The Image Server Administrator's User administration window lets you define access client users.
Access: You access the User administration window by clicking the User Setup... button in the
Image Server Administrator window.
You are able to add new users in two ways, which may be combined.
•
Basic user: Lets you create a dedicated surveillance system user account with basic user
name and password authentication for each individual user. If the NetPDA/NetCell Server is
installed, this method works for NetPDA/NetCell Client users.
•
Windows user: Lets you import individual users or groups defined locally on the server, or
users/groups from Active Directory, and authenticate them based on their Windows login. This
method does not work for NetPDA/NetCell Client users. Using Active Directory requires that a
server with Active Directory installed and acting as domain controller is available on your
network.
259
On-Net Surveillance Systems, Inc.
NetDVMS 6.5f User Manual
How to ...
SLC (Software License Code)
If you have upgraded your NetDVMS or otherwise acquired a new Software License Code (SLC), do the
following to enter the new SLC in the Administrator application:
1.
Click the icon in the left corner of the Administrator window's title bar.
2.
Clicking the icon gives you access to a access to a small menu. Select About Adm ... from the
menu.
3.
In the Software License Code field, overwrite the existing SLC with the new one.
When ready, click OK.
4.
Close the Administrator application by clicking the Exit button. When you start the
Administrator application again, the new SLC will take effect.
Note: In order to write in the Software License Code filed, the Recording Server service must be
paused (see Service Manager Window) or stopped (see Using the Recording Server Manager).
260
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising